Palm Cell Phone PDA CentroTM Smart Device User Manual

User Guide

™

Your Palm Centro Smart Device

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Welcom e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 0

Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1

Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3

Centro^™Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 7

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9

Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 1

Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3

Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 5

Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 0

Moving around on your Palm^®Centro^™smart device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 5

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 9

Opening application s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 3

Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7

Turning your Centro™ smart device on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 9

Making calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1

Receiving calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 7

What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8

How many minutes have I used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 5

Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C O N T E N T S}

iii

Defining favorite buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using a hands-free device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

The VersaMail^®application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Xpress Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Instant Messaging (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Your Push to Talk application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

What is Push to Talk? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Setting up PTT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Creating a PTT contact list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Viewing availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Receiving calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

What can I do when I’m on a PTT call?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Using the Call Lo g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 44

Sending messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Viewing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Customizing your PTT settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your Centro ™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 60

Connecting with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

^{C O N T E N T S}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 69

Camera and Camcorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 71

Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 75

Pocket Tunes™ Delux e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 80

Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 87

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 89

World Cloc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 96

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 98

Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

Documents To Go^®Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 06

Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 07

Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 09

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 11

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 11

Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12

Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 14

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 16

Viewing application info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 18

Sending information with Bluetooth^®wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Beaming informatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 29

Your personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 35

System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 37

Display and appearance settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 38

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C O N T E N T S}

Locking your Centro and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Connecting to a VP N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 52

Common question s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 55

Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Resetting your Centr o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 59

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Scree n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 63

Synchronizatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 64

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Making room on your Centro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Error message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 82

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

^{C O N T E N T S}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Welcome

Congratulations on the purchase of your Palm Centro smart

device!

™

Benefits

•

Make and receive phone calls

•

Browse the web

•

Manage your contacts, calendar,

and task list

Use a Bluetooth headset (sold

separately) for hands-free

operation

•

Receive and send corporate and

personal email messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

What ’s i n the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

W E L C O M E

In one compact and indispensable device,

you now have all of the following:

•

Text and multimedia messaging

Music player

•

Phone application for making and

receiving calls

Applications for reading, creating, and

editing Microsoft Office files and

viewing PDF files

•

Push to Talk application for talking

instantly with other members who are

signed up to use this walkie-talkie type

of service

•

Desktop synchronization software for

entering names, addresses, and more

on your computer, and then transferring

them to your Centro with one press of a

button

•

Contacts application that stores the

names, phone numbers, and even

pictures of friends, family, business

contacts—everyone you stay in touch

with

TIP LOOK HERE: Don’t miss the helpful tips

and cross-references given in these boxes.

•

Email applications for receiving and

sending email (business and personal)

What’s in the box?

Palm OS by ACCESS personal info

applications for storing your

appointments, to-do lists, memos, and

You should have received all the following

items in the box:

•

Expansion card slot that accepts

Hardware

microSD cards (sold separately) for

storing music files, videos, dictionaries,

games, and lots of other applications

•

Centro

AT&T SIM card (not included with all

models; preinstalled in Centro on some

models; see Inserting the SIM card and

battery for details).

An SXGA 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024)

digital camera for snapping photos and

capturing short videos

T H E B O X ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And^WD^How^An^Tl^’o^Sa^Id^N.

W E L C O M E

What do I need to

get started?

KEY TERM SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)

card The smartcard that you insert into your

Centro and that identifies you to the mobile

network. It contains your mobile account

information, such as your phone number and

the services to which you subscribe. Phone

book entries and SMS messages can also be

stored on the SIM card.

This guide helps you set up your Centro

and quickly learn to use it. To get started,

you need all the items that came in the

Centro box (see What ’s i n the box?), plus

the following:

•

Rechargeable battery

AC charger

USB sync cable

•

Appropriate service contracts. Phone

and text messaging services and Push

to Talk service require a service contract

with AT&T. Web, email, and multimedia

messaging services require a service

contract and data services from AT&T.

Be sure to sign up for a mobile account

with data services. Data speeds vary

based on network availability and

Documentation and software

•

Getting Started Guide

Getting Started CD, which includes the

following:

• Palm Desktop software or a link to

this software

capacity. Please contact AT&T for

details about your data service options.

• Links to bonus software for your

Centro

• User Guide (this guide)

•

Palm warranty

TIP Missing something? Need help? Call AT&T

customer service: 1-800-331-0500 or call 611

from your Centro.

W H A T D O

N E E D T O

S T A R T E D ?

^IDownload fr^Gom^{E T}Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

W E L C O M E

•

A SIM card. To use your Centro on the

AT&T network, you must insert the SIM

card into your Centro. Without a SIM

card, you can only call 911.

For a quick introduction

Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you

to many of the features on your Centro.

It is already installed on your Centro, and

you can open it any time. Press

• If your Centro box did not contain a

SIM card, you need to contact AT&T

to get one.

Applications

Tour

, and then select Quick

• If you have an old SIM card from

Cingular Wireless, you can use it if it

conforms to the requirements for the

SIM card to be used in a Centro.

Tutorial: The Palm Tutorial explains how to

make calls, browse the web, and send and

receive email. Find the tutorial on the web

at go.palm.com/centro-att/.

•

A location where you are within

coverage of the AT&T network.

While using your Centro

•

An electrical outlet.

On-device User Guide: A copy of this

guide is included on your Centro. The

on-device guide is specially formatted for

your Centro screen. To view the on-device

The computer with which you want to

synchronize your personal information.

guide, press Applications

select My Centro

, and then

Where to learn more

Tips: Many of the built-in applications

include helpful tips for getting the most out

of your Centro. To view these tips, open an

application, press Menu

Options, and then select Tips.

Whether you’re on the go or at your

computer, there are several ways to learn

, select

™

more about using your Palm Centro

smart device.

W H E R E

L E A R N M O R E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Dow^Tn^Oload.

W E L C O M E

Many dialog boxes have a Tips

icon in

Online forums: Consult online user

the upper-right corner. Select the Tips icon discussion groups to swap Centro

to learn about the tasks you can perform in information and learn about Centro topics

that dialog box.

you may find nowhere else. Visit

go.palm.com/centro-att/ for details.

Online support from Palm: For up-to-date

downloads, troubleshooting, and support

Customer service from AT&T: For

information, go to go.palm.com/centro-att/. questions about your mobile account or

features, contact AT&T at 1-866-246-4852,

If you need more information

or dial 611 from your Centro.

Books: Many books on Palm OS devices

are available in local or online book retailers

(look in the computers section), or visit

go.palm.com/centro-att/.

W H E R E

L E A R N M O R E

^{T O}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Setting up

You’re about to discover the many things about your

Palm^®Centro^™smart device that will help you better manage

your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with

your Centro, you’ll want to personalize the settings and add

applications to make it uniquely yours.

But first, take the few easy steps in this chapter to set up your

Centro and get it running.

Benefits

•

Know where your Centro controls

are located

•

Establish a link between your

Centro and your computer

•

Start using your Centro right away

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

Centro^™Overview

Front view

Stylus

Earpiece

Indicator light (phone

and charge indicator)

5-way navigator and

Center button

Applications

Power/End

Volume

Side button

Phone

Send

Messaging

Calendar

C E N T R O ^™

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.^{O V E R V I E W}

S E T T I N G U P

TIP Protect your screen. Be careful to store

DID YOU KNOW

When your Centro screen is

your Centro away from items that might

scratch or crush the screen. Your Centro

comes with a screen protector. Visit

go.palm.com/centro-att/ to find carrying cases

and other useful accessories.

on, you can press the Side button to open the

Push to Talk application. If you decide not to

subscribe to Push to Talk, you can change

your button settings and select an application

of your choice; see Reassigning buttons for

details.

Back view

Speaker

Self-portrait mirror

Battery door

Camera lens

Infrared (IR) port

Expansion card slot

Headset jack

Sync connector

Power connector

Microphone

Lanyard loop

C E N T R O ^™

^OD^Vo^Ew^Rn^Vl^Io^Ea^Wd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

IMPORTANT The Centro speaker includes phone, email, or web features, the SIM

a large magnet, so be sure to keep your

Centro away from credit cards or other

items that could be demagnetized.

card must be inserted into your Centro.

NOTE Your SIM card may already be

installed in your Centro. Follow steps 1

through 3 to check. If a SIM card did not

come with your Centro, you may already

have one. If the SIM card does not work,

contact AT&T.

Top view

Press the battery door near the top and

slide the battery door downward to

remove it from your Centro.

Ringer switch

Battery door

DID YOU KNOW The Ringer switch silences all

sounds at once. You don’t need to hunt for Off

buttons all over the device.

Inserting the SIM

card and battery

If the battery is installed, remove it.

(See Replacing the battery for details.)

Your SIM card contains account

information such as your phone number

and voicemail access number. To use the

T H E S I M C A R D

B A T T E R Y

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^IM^Na^Sn^Eu^Ra^Tls^{I N}S^Gearch And Downlo^Aad^N.^D

S E T T I N G U P

If the SIM card is already installed, skip

to step 7.

Remove the stylus to make insertion of

the SIM card easier. Replace it when

you finish these steps.

Align the notch on the SIM card with

the right side of the SIM holder.

Align the metal contacts on the battery

with the contacts inside the battery

compartment, insert the battery into the

compartment at a 45-degree angle, and

then press it into place.

Battery

contacts

Insert the straight end of the SIM card

into the SIM holder, and then push the

SIM card forward until it fits into place.

Centro

contacts

T H E

B A T T E R Y

^{I N S E R T I N G}Downl^So^Ia^Md f^Cro^Am^{R D}W^Aw^Nw^D.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

IMPORTANT Use the battery that came

with your Centro. Do not use a battery

synchronization software. Otherwise, you

may lose information or have difficulty with

from another Centro model in your Centro. synchronization. Support is not provided for

Similarly, do not use the Centro battery in

another Centro model. Using a battery that

is designed for another Centro model can

damage your Centro. For info on

replacement batteries, see Replacing the

battery.

mismatched language setups.

NOTE If the correct battery is inserted and

your Centro still does not turn on, you need

to connect it to the AC charger. Make sure

the AC charger is plugged in to a wall

outlet. If your Centro still does not turn on

after being connected to the AC charger for

five minutes, do a soft reset. See

NOTE Unauthorized batteries will not

power your Centro. Only a Palm approved

battery will wake up and power your

Centro. If your Centro does not turn on,

check to see whether an unauthorized

battery has been inserted in your Centro.

Performing a soft reset.

TIP The power-saving feature turns off the

Centro screen after a period of inactivity. To

wake up the screen, press and release

Power/End, and then press Center on the

5-way to turn off Keyguard.

Slide the battery door onto the back of

the Centro until it clicks into place.

Your Centro screen wakes up and

begins the setup process. When the

language selection screen appears,

select the language you want to use,

and then follow the onscreen

Charging the battery

The battery comes with a sufficient charge

to complete the setup process and activate

your phone. After activation, we

recommend charging your Centro for three

hours (or until the indicator light is solid

instructions to set up your Centro.

IMPORTANT Always use the same

language for your Centro, your computer

operating system, and your desktop

C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

green) to give it a full charge. See

Maximizing battery life for tips on

DID YOU KNOW

You can also trickle-charge

your Centro without the AC charger by

connecting it to your computer with the sync

cable. Trickle-charging takes longer, however.

Be sure to plug your computer into a power

source, or your Centro could drain the

computer’s battery. For the quickest charge

time, use the AC charger.

maximizing the life of your Centro battery.

TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your

Centro every day, especially if you use your

phone often.

DID YOU KNOW If your battery ever becomes

fully drained, your info is still stored safely on

your Centro until you connect it to a power

source and charge the battery.

When trickle-charging your Centro with the

sync cable, the indicator light may not turn on.

To make sure the battery is being charged,

check the onscreen battery indicator.

Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

To confirm that your Centro is being

charged, check the indicator light on

your Centro.

Connect the charger cable to the

bottom of your Centro. Make sure the

arrow on the connector is facing up,

toward the screen.

• Solid red indicates that your Centro is

being charged.

• Solid green indicates that your Centro

is fully charged.

Indicator light

T H E

^{C H A R G I N G}Down^Blo^Aa^Td^Tfr^Eo^Rm^YWww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

To see the remaining battery charge

expressed as a percentage, tap the

onscreen battery icon.

TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a

few moments for the indicator light to turn on

when you begin charging.

TIP If the indicator light does not turn on when

you connect your Centro to the AC charger,

double-check the cable connection and the

electrical outlet to which it is connected.

Battery icon

When your Centro is on (see T u rning your

Centro™ smart device on and off), the

onscreen battery icon displays the charging

status:

A red lightning bolt indicates that the

battery is connected to an electrical

outlet and is being charged.

Maximizing battery

life

A green lightning bolt indicates that

the battery is connected to an

electrical outlet and is fully charged.

Battery life depends on how you use your

Centro. You can maximize the life of your

battery by following a few easy guidelines:

A partial battery without a lightning

bolt indicates that the battery is not

connected to an electrical outlet and

it has some power.

IMPORTANT You must use the battery

that came with your Centro or a

Palm-approved replacement. For info on

replacement batteries, see Replacing the

battery.

An almost empty battery that is red

at the bottom indicates that you

need to charge the battery

immediately.

M A X I M I Z I N G

L I F E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downlo^Ba^Ad.^{T T E R Y}

S E T T I N G U P

Unauthorized batteries cannot power your

Centro. Only a battery approved by Palm

will wake up and power your Centro.

•

If you don’t plan to use the wireless

features on your Centro for a while, turn

off your phone (see T u rning your

Centro™ smart device on and off) and

let all calls be picked up by voicemail.

•

You can buy an extra battery as a spare

for long plane trips or periods of heavy

use. To purchase batteries that are

compatible with your Centro, go to

att.com/wirelessaccessories or visit

your local AT&T store.

As with any mobile phone, if you are in

an area with no wireless coverage, your

Centro searches for a signal, which

consumes power. If you cannot move to

an area of better coverage, temporarily

turn off your phone. While your phone is

off, you can continue to use the

•

Charge your Centro whenever you can.

Charge it overnight. The battery has a

much longer useful life when it is

topped off frequently than when it is

charged after it is fully drained.

nonwireless features of your Centro.

•

Turn down the screen brightness (see

Adjusting the brightness).

The wireless features (phone, email,

messaging, Push to Talk, and web) and

media features (camera, media players,

eBooks, and games) of your Centro

consume more power than its organizer

features. Speakerphone usage also

consumes more power than using the

earpiece. If you use the wireless,

speakerphone, and media features

often, keep an eye on the battery icon

and charge when necessary.

Decrease the settings in Power

Preferences and turn off Beam Receive

(see Optimizing power settings).

•

Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re

not using it. See Connecting to a

Bluetooth^®hands-free device.

L I F E

^{M A X I M I Z I N}D^Go^Bw^An^Tlo^Ta^Ed^Rf^Yrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

Press Left to select the Dial Pad

tab.

Making your first call

Status

icons

Press Phone

If prompted, press Center

to turn

off Keyguard (see Locking your

keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).

Call Log

Dial Pad

Favorites

Contacts

Main

Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the

number you want to call.

Center

• If Check SIM Card appears in the title

bar, see Inserting the SIM card and

battery.

• If a blank space appears in the title

bar, the phone is either searching for a

network or you’re outside a wireless

coverage area. It may take a few

moments for the title bar to display a

network name. If you believe you are

in a wireless coverage area and this

problem persists, contact AT&T for

assistance.

Press Send

to dial the number.

If prompted, press Center

Yes and turn on your phone.

to select

M A K I N G Y O U R

C A L L

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^F. ^{I R S T}

S E T T I N G U P

What’s my phone number?

TIP If you are inside a coverage area and

cannot complete a call, contact AT&T for

assistance.

Make sure your phone is on (see

T u rning your phone on and off).

Press Phone

After you finish the call, press Power/

Press Menu

End

to end the call.

Select Options, and then select Phone

Info.

Adjusting call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume button on the side of your Centro

to adjust the call volume.

Look here for

your phone

number

•

To increase the volume, press the upper

half of the Volume button.

•

To decrease the volume, press the

lower half of the Volume button.

If your phone number doesn’t appear in

Phone Info, make sure your SIM card is

properly inserted into your Centro. If your

phone number still does not appear in

Phone Info, look for the number on the

plastic holder to which the SIM card was

attached. If you still need assistance,

please contact AT&T.

Volume

Side button

M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T

Download fr^Com^{A L}W^Lww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

•

32MB of available memory (RAM)

170MB of free hard disk space

CD drive

Setting up your

computer for

synchronization

Available USB port

Mac OS X version 10.3 to 10.5:

•

128MB of total memory (RAM)

190MB of free hard disk space

CD drive

Before you can synchronize the info on

your computer and the info on your Centro,

you need to install the desktop

synchronization software and connect the

sync cable to your computer.

Available USB port

You can use either Palm^®Desktop software

(included) or Microsoft Outlook for

Windows (sold separately) as your desktop

software.

Upgrading from another PalmOS^®by

ACCESS device

NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm

OS^®device, skip ahead to Installing the

desktop synchronization software.

Not familiar with synchronization? See

Synchronizing information—the basics.

When you install the desktop software

from the Getting Started CD, some

third-party applications may be quarantined

because they are not compatible with the

Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on your

Centro. Quarantined files are not installed

on your Centro, nor are they deleted.

These files are placed in a new folder on

your computer: C:\Program

System requirements

Your computer should meet the following

minimum system profiles for Windows or

Mac computers.

Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2),

Windows Media Center Edition 2005, or

Vista:

Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And D^So^Yw^Nnl^Co^Had^R.^{O N I Z A T I O N}

S E T T I N G U P

Incompatible Apps. (Can’t find a Palm

Calculate how much space your apps

and info occupy on your previous Palm

OS device.

folder in Program Files? Then look for a

folder labeled palmOne or Handspring

instead. For more info, see I can’t find my

user folder.)

• In Applications View, open the menus.

• Select Info on the App menu.

IMPORTANT Synchronize your Centro only

with the version of Palm Desktop software

included with your device. Older versions

may not work correctly.

• At the bottom of the screen, select

Size.

TIP We do not recommend using third-party

utilities that back up your old device’s

information onto an expansion card and then

transfer the info to your Centro. Such methods

transfer all applications to your Centro,

including those that are not designed to work

with Palm OS version 5.4.9.

• Look at the numbers on the Free

Space line and subtract the number

on the left from the number on the

right to calculate the space used. For

example, on the device shown here,

22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that

4.9MB of space is occupied on this

device.

You can transfer all compatible applications

and information from your previous Palm

OS device—whether it’s a handheld or a

Treo—to your new Centro, so long as the

space taken up by all the info you want to

transfer is 64MB or less. This includes your

calendar events, contacts, memos, and

tasks, as well as your application settings

and any compatible third-party applications

and files.

If the space occupied on your previous

device is 64MB or less, go to step 3. If

the space occupied is greater than

64MB, do any of the following to reduce

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R

Download from Www.Soma^Sn^Yua^Nl^Cs.^Hco^Rm^O.^NA^{I Z}ll^AM^Ta^{I O}nu^Nals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

the storage space you’re using before

you go to the next step:

• Connect your Centro to your

computer (see Connecting your

Centro to your computer).

• Delete any third-party applications

that you no longer use.

• Indicate that you want to sync only

the info in your PIM apps (Calendar,

Contacts, Memos, and Tasks). This is

strongly recommended to ensure an

optimal upgrade experience. Or

indicate that you want to sync all info

and apps (excluding apps known to be

incompatible).

• Move large files, such as eBooks and

images, to an expansion card.

• Move third-party applications to an

expansion card.

• Purge old info in applications such as

Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),

and email. Refer to the

documentation that came with your

previous device for instructions on

these items.

• Select a device name for your Centro;

be sure to select the same name that

you used for your old device. (To

locate this name, select the HotSync

application on your old Palm device.

The device name appears in the

Synchronize your previous device with

your previous desktop software to back

up your information one last time.

upper-right corner of the screen.)

Install the desktop synchronization

software from your new Getting Started

CD (see Installing the desktop

synchronization software).

MAC ONLY If you have pictures on

your previous device, copy them from

your previous device to an expansion

card or beam them to your Centro.

During the installation process, sync

your Centro with your new desktop

software as instructed. When

prompted, do the following:

If you plan to continue using your

previous device, perform a hard reset

on your previous device to remove its

associated device name. (See the

documentation that came with your

previous device for instructions on

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And D^So^Yw^Nnl^Co^Had^R.^{O N I Z A T I O N}

S E T T I N G U P

performing a hard reset.) Each device

BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing

on a computer at work, make sure your

computer is configured to let you install

new software. Contact your company’s

IT department for help.

you synchronize with your computer

must have a unique name. The next

time you synchronize your previous

device with your computer, be sure to

assign it a new name.

If any third-party applications are

quarantined during the installation, do not

manually install them. Contact the

third-party developer for software updates

and info about compatibility with your

Centro.

TIP If you want to sync info with applications

other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft

Outlook, you need to purchase additional

third-party sync software. This sync software

is sometimes called a conduit.

Close any applications that are currently

running on your computer, including

those that are minimized. Your

computer needs to have all its

resources available to install the

software.

If you have trouble upgrading or finding

quarantined files, see Upgrading.

Installing the desktop synchronization

software

IMPORTANT Even if you already own a

Palm OS device and have installed a

previous version of the desktop software,

you must install the software from the

Getting Started CD that came with your

Centro.

Insert the Getting Started CD into the

CD drive on your computer.

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R

Download from Www.Soma^Sn^Yua^Nl^Cs.^Hco^Rm^O.^NA^{I Z}ll^AM^Ta^{I O}nu^Nals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

Palm Desktop software or Microsoft

Outlook.

NOTE Whether you select to synchronize

with Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop

software, Palm Desktop software is still

installed on your computer. If you use

Outlook as your desktop email application,

select Outlook as your desktop

synchronization software. Remember that

when you enter information on your

computer, you must enter it in the software

you selected in this step.

If you are installing on a Mac,

double-click the CD icon on the desktop,

and then double-click the Palm

Software.pkg icon.

• The installation process prompts you

to connect your Centro to your

computer. Go to the next section.

When the installation wizard opens,

follow the onscreen instructions. Note

these important points about the

installation.

Connecting your Centro to your computer

After you install the desktop software (see

Installing the desktop synchronization

software), you’re ready to connect your

Centro to your computer.

• When the language selection screen

appears, select the same language

you selected on your Centro.

Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

Plug the USB sync cable into an

available USB port or into a powered

USB hub connected to your computer.

• WINDOWS ONLY You can choose

which desktop software you want to

use for synchronization:

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And D^So^Yw^Nnl^Co^Had^R.^{O N I Z A T I O N}

S E T T I N G U P

Synchronizing

information—the

basics

TIP For best performance, plug your sync

cable directly into a USB port on your

computer. If your computer has USB ports on

both the front and back, we recommend using

the back port; the front port is often a

low-power port. If you use a USB hub, make

sure the hub has its own power supply.

Synchronizing means that info you enter or

change in one place (your Centro or your

computer) is automatically entered or

changed in the other; so there’s no need to

enter the info twice. We strongly

recommend that you sync your Centro with

your computer or corporate server

frequently to keep your info up-to-date (and

backed up) in both locations.

With the sync button facing up, connect

the sync cable to the bottom of your

Centro. Do not press the sync button

until you are instructed to do so.

(Optional) Connect the charger cable to

the bottom of your Centro.

You are now ready to synchronize; go to

Synchronizing information—the basics.

The info from all the following applications

is updated by default each time you sync

your Centro with your desktop software:

How each application syncs depends on

your computer type and the desktop

software you are using, as follows:

Sync button

Sync cable

I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Iw^Nn^Gload from Www.Somanu^Bal^As^S.c^Io^Cm^S. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

Computer type

Desktop software

What syncs and where

Windows

Microsoft Outlook

•

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and

Tasks sync with Outlook.

•

Pictures & Videos syncs with

Palm Desktop.

Windows

Mac

Palm Desktop

All apps sync with Palm Desktop.

For more sync options, including which

apps sync, see Synchronizing

information—advanced.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,

you must install Palm Desktop software

from the Getting Started CD that came

with your Centro—even if you sync with

Outlook or another third-party application.

See Installing the desktop synchronization

software for instructions.

Sync button

Messages on both your computer and

your Centro indicate that

synchronization is in progress.

Connect your Centro to your computer,

as described in Connecting your Centro

to your computer.

Wait until you see the message on your

Centro that the HotSync operation is

complete; then disconnect the sync

cable. Do not disconnect the sync cable

until you see this message.

Press the sync button on the sync

cable.

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S E T T I N G U P

Problems synchronizing? See

Where’s my info stored?

Synchronization for troubleshooting

suggestions.

When you synchronize your Centro, your

info is stored on your computer in one of

these locations:

If you’re finishing your initial setup, you

now have the option to install bonus

software. If you choose to install some of

the bonus software, you need to sync

again to install the software on your

Centro. You can also install bonus software

later; see Installing applications.

Windows XP and earlier: Program Files >

Palm > HotSyncUsername

Windows Vista: Username > Documents

> Palm > HotSyncUsername

For info on locating your pictures and

videos on your computer, see Viewing

pictures and videos on your computer.

I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Iw^Nn^Gload from Www.Somanu^Bal^As^S.c^Io^Cm^S. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Moving around on your

Palm^®Centro^™smart device

Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you

figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the

avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your

Centro is similar. Most applications on your device use the

same set of controls in the same way. So once you learn how

to use these controls on your Palm^®Centro^™smart device,

you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.

Benefits

•

Find and open applications quickly

Access extra features with menus

•

Access many more characters and

symbols than are displayed on the

keyboard

Move around in applications with

one hand, using the 5-way

navigator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Moving around the

screen

TIP Some third-party applications may not

work with the 5-way navigator, and you must

use the stylus instead.

DID YOU KNOW

In this guide, we use arrow

icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.

These are different from any onscreen arrows

that you tap with your stylus or select with the

5-way to display pick lists.

To move around the Centro screen, you

can use the 5-way navigator for

one-handed navigation, or you can tap

items on the screen with the stylus. With

use, you will find your own favorite way to

scroll, highlight, and select menu items.

The 5-way includes the following buttons:

Center

Left

Right

Down

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Highlighting and selecting items

On most screens, one item—a button, a

list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by

default. The highlight identifies which item

is affected by your next action. Use Left

Right , Up , and Down on the

5-way to move the highlight from one item

to another.

TIP If the item you want doesn’t appear on the

screen, try tapping the onscreen scroll arrows

to view more info.

Colored background: When a phone

number, text, an email address, a web link,

or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is

displayed as white text against a colored

background. Examples of lists include the

Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the

Tasks list.

Learn to recognize the highlight. It can take

two forms:

Border glow: When an entire screen, an

onscreen button (such as Done, New, or

OK) or a pick list is highlighted, a glow

appears around its border. If an entire

screen is highlighted, the glow appears at

the top and bottom of the screen only.

After highlighting an item, you can select or

activate it by pressing Center

, or by

tapping the item with the stylus.

TIP When a border appears at the top and

bottom of a list screen, press Center on the

5-way to highlight the first item in the list.

TIP After you open an application (see

Opening applications), experiment with using

the 5-way to highlight various screen

elements.

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Highlighting text

Selecting menu items

You can use the stylus to highlight text on

the screen.

Many applications have menus to give you

access to additional features. These menus

are usually hidden from view, but they

•

Tap and drag the stylus across the text

you want to highlight.

appear when you press Menu

. To get

the most out of your Centro, it’s a good

idea to familiarize yourself with the

additional features available through the

various application menus.

•

To highlight a word, double-tap it.

To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.

Accessing command buttons

Press Menu

to display an

In most applications, command buttons

such as New, OK, and Details appear at the

bottom of the screen. In many cases, you

can jump directly to these buttons instead

of scrolling to them.

application’s menus.

•

From a list screen, such as the Memos

list, press Right to jump to the first

button.

Menu shortcut

From a screen where you create or edit

entries, such as Contact Edit, press

Center

to jump to the first button.

Press Right and Left to switch

From a dialog box, such as Edit

between menus.

Categories, press Up

or Down to

Press Up

menu item.

and Down to highlight a

scroll to the buttons.

Press Center

to select the menu

item, or press Menu

to close the

menu and cancel your selection.

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

•

To exit the pick list without making a

selection, press Left or Right

Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list.

TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts

listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,

press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t

have to see the menu item to use the menu

shortcut.

•

Tap the item you want from the list.

To exit the pick list without making a

selection, tap outside the list.

Selecting options in a pick list

A range of options is often presented in a

type of menu called a pick list, which can

be identified by a downward-pointing

arrow. Pick lists are different from the

application menus previously described.

The application menus give you access to

additional features, and pick lists let you

select the contents for a particular field.

You can select items from a pick list with

the 5-way or the stylus.

5-way: Use the 5-way

to highlight the

pick list, and then press Center

display the items in the list.

•

Press Up

the item you want.

and Down to highlight

Press Center

to select the

highlighted item.

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Using the keyboard

Backlight

Backspace

Return

Option

Shift/Find

Space

Alt

TIP When using the keyboard, most people

find it easiest to hold the Centro with two

hands and use the tips of both thumbs to

press the keys.

DID YOU KNOW

The Centro includes a

keyboard backlight that turns on and off when

the screen turns on and off. The backlight also

dims when an active call lasts longer than a

specified period of time. See Optimizing

power settings to adjust the automatic

shut-off and dimming intervals.

U S I N G T H E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.^{K E Y B O A R D}

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Entering lowercase and uppercase letters Entering numbers, punctuation, and

symbols

•

To enter lowercase letters, press the

desired keys.

Numbers, punctuation, and symbols

appear above the letters on the keys.

To enter these characters, do one of

the following:

•

To enter an uppercase letter, press

Shift/Find

key. You don’t need to press and hold

Shift/Find while entering a letter.

and then press a letter

Symbol

Letter

When Shift is active, an up arrow

appears in the lower-right corner of the

screen.

•

To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/

•

Press Option , and then press the

key with the desired character shown

above the letter. You don’t need to press

Find

Shift/Find

is on, an underlined up arrow

appears in the lower-right corner of the

screen.

twice. To turn it off, press

once. When Caps Lock

and hold Option

while pressing the

second key. When Option is active, the

symbol appears in the lower-right

corner of the screen.

•

To turn Option Lock on, press

Option

twice. To turn it off, press

once. When Option Lock is

on, the symbol appears in the

lower-right corner of the screen.

U S I N G

K E Y B O A R D

^{T H E}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Enter the character that corresponds to

the symbol or accented character you

want. See the table on the next page.

DID YOU KNOW Some application views, such

as the Dial Pad tab in the Phone application or

the Calculator, automatically default to Option

Lock. In this case, you do not need to press

Option to enter numbers.

Press Alt

Press Up , Down , Right , or Left

to highlight the desired character.

Entering other symbols and accented

characters

Press Center

character.

to insert the

Symbols and accented characters that do

not appear on the keyboard are available

DID YOU KNOW

Alternate characters are

grouped by their similarity to the base key. For

example, the alternate characters available

from the E key are é, è, ë, and ê.

when you use the Alt

key.

U S I N G T H E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.^{K E Y B O A R D}

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Symbols and accented characters

Enter…

Then press

Alt to

Enter…

Then press

Alt to

Enter…

Then press

Alt to

select…

á à ä â ã å æ

Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ

select…

ú ù ü û

Ú Ù Ü Û

x ¤

b or B

ó ò ö ô œ õ

x or X

ç ¢ ©

Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ

ý ÿ

Ç ¢ ©

p or P

r or R

Ý Ÿ

é è ë ê

É È Ë Ê

í ì ï î

ß š

ß Š

™

:-) :-( ;-)

£ ¥ ¢

Í Ì Ï Î

t or T

l or L

Press Alt

by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these

characters:

; _ • \ % = ° ÷

£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |

U S I N G

K E Y B O A R D

^{T H E}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Using the quick buttons

Opening applications

The front of the Centro has three quick

buttons—Phone, Calendar, and

When you open an application using a

quick button or Applications View, you

automatically close the app you were

previously using.

Messaging—that open applications. The

fourth button opens Applications View (see

Using Applications View).

TIP You can customize the quick buttons

yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.

Applications

Messaging

Phone

Calendar

O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Each quick button opens two applications:

Assigning an application to the

Messaging button

•

To open a button’s primary application,

simply press the button.

The first time you press the Messaging

button, you are asked to select the primary

application for the button from the available

email and messaging applications. For

more information on each of these

applications, see Y o ur email and other

messages.

Button

Primary app

Phone

Calendar

Xpress Mail or

Messaging

Press Messaging

Select the application you want this

button to open. You can select Xpress

Mail or Messaging (text and

multimedia messages).

NOTE The first time you press Messaging

, a dialog box appears in which you

can select the primary application (see

Assigning an application to the Messaging

button).

You can change the primary application at

any time (see Reassigning buttons).

•

To open a button’s secondary

application, press Option

press the quick button.

DID YOU KNOW

Pressing Option + Menu dims

and then

your Centro screen.

Buttons

Secondary app

Web

Memos

Messaging

O P E N I N G

^AD^Po^Pw^Ln^{I C}lo^Aa^Td^{I O}fro^Nm^SWww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

Using Applications View

Press Center

to open the selected

application.

You can access all available applications

through Applications View.

In Applications View, you can also do the

following:

Press Applications

•

Press Applications

repeatedly to

Press Center on the 5-way to turn off

Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard) for more info).

cycle through various categories of

applications. See Applications settings

for more info on categories.

Use the 5-way

to highlight the

Enter the first few letters of the

application’s name to highlight it. For

example, if you press P, it highlights

Phone; if you then press R, it highlights

Prefs. If you pause and then press R, it

highlights the first application that starts

with R.

application you want to use.

TIP You can press and hold Applications from

any screen on your Centro to select from a list

of your most recently used applications.

O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ^®C E N T R O ^™S M A R T D E V I C E

O P E N I N G

^AD^Po^Pw^Ln^{I C}lo^Aa^Td^{I O}fro^Nm^SWww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Your phone

The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls

and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with.

You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between

calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating conference

calls with up to five callers. Your Palm^®Centro^™smart device helps you

perform all these tasks with ease.

You can do more than manage your phone calls in the phone

application. You can send text messages, open applications, go to your

favorite web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find

out how many unread email messages you have.

Benefits

•

Stay in touch—you choose how

•

Have fun: add wallpaper and

ringtones

•

Save time with shortcuts to your

favorite info

Make or receive calls without

taking your hands off the steering

wheel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

T u rning your Centro™ smart device on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

What can I do when I’m on a call ?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8

How many minutes have I used?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Entering names and phone number s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5

Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

What are all those icons ?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Press and release Power/End to

wake up the screen.

Turning your

Centro™ smart

device on and off

TIP You can also press any of the quick buttons

or the Applications button to wake up your

Centro screen.

NOTE We use the term phone to describe

the feature of your Centro that lets you

connect to the AT&T network to make and

receive calls and transmit data.

Power/End

Center

The phone and the screen of your Centro

can be turned on and off separately. You

can wake up the screen to use just the

organizer and media applications of your

Centro (such as Contacts, Calendar, Pocket

Tunes^™, and Pictures & Videos) without

turning on the phone. Also, when the

screen is turned off, the phone can be on

and ready for you to receive and make

calls.

Press Center

to turn off Keyguard.

For more info about turning Keyguard on

and off, see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard).

Press and release Power/End to turn

off the screen and lock the keyboard.

Waking up the screen and turning it off

TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.

Press Applications, select Preferences,

select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off

after setting.

Wake up the screen and leave the phone

turned off when you want to use only the

organizer features of your Centro—for

example, when you’re on a plane and want

to look at your calendar.

Y O U R

S M A R T D E V I C E O N A N D O F F

Download from Www.Som^Tan^Uu^Ra^Nls^I.^Nc^Gom. All M^Ca^Enu^Na^Tl^Rs^OS^™earch And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Turning your phone on and off

You know your phone is on and that

you’re inside a coverage area when you

go to the Main tab of the Phone

When your phone is on, it is connected to

the AT&T network (provided you are in a

coverage area) so that you can make and

receive phone calls and use wireless

services, such as email, messaging, and

the web browser. During initial setup, your

phone is automatically turned on, so you

can use wireless services right away.

application and you see the Signal

Strength

icon at the top of the

screen.

TIP If you’re outside a coverage area, the

upper-left corner appears blank and the

indicator light flashes red.

If you turn off your phone, you can still use

the organizer features such as Calendar

and Contacts, as well as the media

features such as Pocket Tunes and Pictures

& Videos. You might hear this referred to as

flight mode because you must turn your

phone off when you’re on a plane.

Press and hold Power/End again to

turn off your phone.

You know your phone is off when you

go to the Main tab of the Phone

application and you see Phone Off at

the top of the screen.

Wake up the screen.

Press and hold Power/End to turn on Opening the Phone application

your phone.

Press Phone

to display the Main tab

in the Phone application.

TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,

you hear a series of tones when you turn your

phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).

T U R N I N G

D E V I C E O N

O F F

^YD^Oo^Uw^Rnl^Co^Ead^{N T}fr^Ro^Om^™W^Sw^Mw^A.S^Ro^Tmanuals.com. ^AA^Nll^DManuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad

Status

icons

Press Phone

Select the Dial Pad

tab.

Enter the phone number by tapping the

onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.

TIP Press Backspace to delete numbers

you’ve entered. To cancel the call altogether,

press Phone to return to the Main tab in the

Phone application.

Call Log

Dial Pad

Favorites

Contacts

Main

DID YOU KNOW You can choose which tab

appears when you press the Phone button.

See Customizing the Main tab in the Phone

application for details. If you change the

default tab, you need to modify the steps in

this chapter accordingly.

Making calls

Press Send

to make the call.

There are several ways to make a call. Try

them all to find out which way you like

best.

DID YOU KNOW

You can paste numbers

directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from

another application, press Phone, and select

the Dial Pad tab. Open the Edit menu and

select Paste. Press Send to dial the number.

M A K I N G C A L L S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Dialing using the keyboard

add contacts directly into your Centro (see

Adding a contact), but the fastest way to

enter lots of contacts is to enter them in

your desktop software and then

synchronize to transfer them to your

Centro (see Synchronizing information—

the basics). You can also import contacts

from your SIM card (see tips on Viewing

your SIM Phonebook).

Press Phone

Press the numbered keys to enter the

phone number. (You don’t need to press

Option.)

Press Phone

Select the Contacts

tab.

Using the keyboard, start entering one

of the following for the contact you

want to call:

• First name (JOH for John)

• Last name (SMI for Smith)

• First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

Press Send to make the call.

TIP After you enter a phone number, you can

also press Center on the 5-way to select

whether to make a phone call or send a text

message to that number.

• First few letters of first and last name

(SM AN for Smilla Anderson)

For example, entering SM would display

Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and

Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only

John Smith.

Dialing by contact name

You need to have names and numbers in

your contact list before you can make a call

by contact name or phone number. You can

M A K I N G C A L L S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Voice dialing

Text appears

here as you

enter it

You can use the Voice Dialing application to

call people in your Contacts list by saying

their name or number. If the person you are

calling has more than one phone number,

you can specify which number to call.

Press Applications

Select Voice Dial

A voice prompts you to “say a

command.”

TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to

delete letters or numbers you’ve entered. Or

press Phone to return to the Main tab in the

Phone application.

Do one of the following:

To call a person in your contact list by

saying their name: For example, say,

“Call John Doe.” If a contact has

multiple numbers, you can specify

which number to call. For example, say,

“Call John Doe Home.”

Highlight the number you want to dial.

Press Send to make the call.

TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight

the name and press Center on the 5-way to

view the address, company, and other details.

To call a number by saying the

individual digits: For example, say,

“Call 408-555-1234.”

DID YOU KNOW

If you want to be able to dial a

call from the Main tab in the Phone application

by entering a name or a number, you can

change a setting to do that (see Customizing

phone settings).

M A K I N G C A L L S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button

TIP You can see all the contact numbers for

the selected person or business. Highlight a

speed-dial favorite button and press Space

on the keyboard to see alternate phone

numbers if the speed-dial favorite was created

from a contact.

Your Centro comes with a few predefined

speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can

also create your own favorites. See

Creating a speed-dial favorite button.

Press Phone

Select the Favorites

tab.

Press Send

or Center

to make

Use the 5-way

to highlight the

the call.

speed-dial favorite you want.

Dialing from a web page or message

Look for the

icon to distinguish a

speed-dial favorite from other types of

favorites.

Your Centro recognizes most phone

numbers that appear on web pages or in

text, email, or multimedia messages.

TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly

press Down on the 5-way.

Select the phone number on the web

page or in the message.

M A K I N G C A L L S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to

highlight and dial a phone number on a web

page or in a message, it means that your

Centro doesn’t recognize the number as a

phone number. You can still use the menus to

copy and paste the number into the Dial Pad.

Press Center

Number dialog box.

to open the Dial

To select from your call history list:

Select the Call Log tab, highlight the

number you want to call, and then press

Send to dial the number.

Select Dial to make the call.

Redialing a recently called number

To dial the last number: Select the

Main

Send

tab, and then press and hold

to dial the last number you called.

To select from your most recently dialed

numbers: Select the Main tab, press

Send to open the Redial list, highlight

the number you want to call, and then

press Send again to make the call.

DID YOU KNOW

You can send a text message

from Contacts or your Call Log by highlighting

a number, pressing Center on the 5-way, and

then selecting Message.

M A K I N G C A L L S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

To answer a call, do one of the following:

Receiving calls

•

Press Send

Select Answer.

To receive calls, your phone must be on.

This is different from having only the

screen turned on (see T u rning your phone

on and off). When your phone is off, your

calls go to voicemail.

NOTE Pressing Phone

silences the

ringer, but it does not answer the call.

To ignore a call, do one of the following:

Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/

End or select Ignore.

DID YOU KNOW If you are playing music on

your Centro and a call arrives, the music

pauses automatically and resumes when you

hang up or ignore the call.

Send the caller a text message: Select

Ignore with Text. This option sends the

call to voicemail and opens a text message

addressed to the caller.

NOTE Sending text messages to land-line

phones may not be supported.

To silence the phone while it is ringing, do

one of the following:

•

Press any key on your Centro except

Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.

•

Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off

. This immediately silences all

TIP See a photo of the person calling you!

Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in

Assigning a caller ID photo.

system sounds, including the ringer.

C A L L S

^{R E C E I V I N G}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Voicemail notification

DID YOU KNOW When you silence the ringer

while it is ringing, you can either answer the

call or let it ring through to voicemail.

When you have a new voicemail message,

you are notified with an Alert dialog box.

Using voicemail

Your wireless service includes voicemail.

Keep in mind that airtime and other

charges may apply when you use voicemail

from your phone.

•

To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select

OK.

Setting up voicemail

Press Phone

Press and hold 1 to dial the AT&T

TIP To permanently dismiss the reminder, tap

the blinking bell icon that appears in the

upper-left corner of the screen. This opens the

Alert dialog box and lets you dismiss the alert.

See Viewing and using the alerts.

automated voicemail system.

Follow the voice prompts to set up your

voicemail.

TIP If you can’t connect to the AT&T voicemail

system, contact AT&T for assistance:

•

To play the message, select Listen.

When you have messages that you have

not listened to, a Voicemail icon also

appears in the title bar of the Phone

application. You can also select this icon to

listen to your voicemail.

• Dial 611 from your Centro.

• Call 1-800-331-0500 from any phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Do^Uw^Snl^Io^Na^Gd.^{V O I C E M A I L}

Y O U R P H O N E

Listening to voicemail messages

What can I do when

I’m on a call?

Press Phone

Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail

system.

When you make or receive a call, Active

Call View appears.

TIP You can also select the Voicemail favorite

button to dial the voicemail system.

Caller’s name

and number

Enter your voicemail password using

the keyboard.

Call duration

Call status

TIP You don’t need to press Option to enter

numbers, *, or # during a call.

NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the

Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a

favorite button for details), you can select

this button to enter your password.

Button label

TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any

key except Send or Power/End to restore the

screen brightness.

DID YOU KNOW

You can set how long the

screen stays at full brightness during phone

calls. See Optimizing power settings for

details.

W H A T

D O W H E N I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

^{C A N}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Use the 5-way

or the stylus to select

Lets you make another call while

the onscreen buttons. Here’s what the

buttons do:

the first call is on hold; see Making

a second call for details. For info on

handling a second incoming call,

see Receiving a second call (call

waiting).

Turns on the speakerphone, which

means that you and everybody

around you can hear the call. (The

caller can hear you as well.) The

advantage is that you can check

your calendar, look up contact info,

take notes, and use other features

during a call. This button is not

available when you use a headset.

Opens the Dial Pad so you can use

it to dial additional numbers, such as

an extension or a response to a

voice prompt.

Dials any extra digits (such as a

password or an extension) that you

assigned to a speed-dial favorite

button. See Defining favorite

buttons for information on defining

extra digits. This button disappears

after you select it to dial the

numbers.

Turns off the speakerphone when it

is on.

Replaces the Speakerphone button

when you use a Bluetooth

hands-free device. Select this

button to stop using the hands-free

device and switch to holding your

Centro to your ear.

Mutes the microphone so that you

and the noise around you can’t be

heard on the other end. The call

status changes to Muted. When

you want to speak, be sure to select

the Mute button again.

Puts a call on hold, and the call

status changes to On Hold. To take

the call off hold, select this button

again.

W H A T

D O

I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals^CS^Ae^Narch An^Wd ^HD^Eo^Nwnload.

Y O U R P H O N E

(Optional) If you want to continue

talking while viewing another

application, select Speakerphone or

connect a headset (see Using a

hands-free device).

TIP Do you accidentally press onscreen

buttons when you’re on a call? You can disable

the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during

phone calls; see Locking your screen.

Remember: To manage an active call when

the touchscreen is disabled, use the hardware

buttons on your Centro.

Press Applications

Select the icon for the application you

want to open.

Ending a call

When you’re ready to leave the app,

open another app or press Phone

to return to Active Call View.

Do one of the following:

•

Press Power/End

Press the button on the headset (if the

headset is attached).

DID YOU KNOW You can press Phone to toggle

between Active Call View and the Main tab in

the Phone app, so you can access other tabs,

such as Contacts and Favorites, during a call.

Switching applications during a call

You can use your organizer apps and other

applications while you’re talking on the

phone; so go ahead and check your

calendar, or go to Memos and enter the

driving directions your caller is giving you.

You can even send text messages while

you’re on a call.

Saving phone numbers

When you hang up a call with a number

that is not in your Contacts list, you are

prompted to add the number to your

Contacts list.

NOTE What you can’t do, however, is

make a data connection while on a call.

This means that you can’t browse the web

or send or receive email or multimedia

messages.

W H A T

D O W H E N I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

^{C A N}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

If you don’t add a number right away, follow

these steps to add it later.

Press Phone

Select the Call Log

Highlight the number you want to save.

Press Menu

tab.

Select Add Contact.

Select New to create a new contact, or

select Add to add this number to an

existing contact.

TIP You can turn the Add New Number prompt

on and off. In Contacts, open the Options

menu, and select Preferences. To turn this

option on, check the Ask to add unknown

phone numbers after calls box. To turn this

option off, uncheck this box.

Enter the information for the entry, and

then select Done.

Making a second call

You can make a second call while your first

call is still active. You can then switch

between two independent conversations,

or you can join several calls in a

•

To create a new contact entry for this

number, select Create a New Contact,

and enter the contact’s info.

•

To add this number to an existing

contact entry, select Add to a Contact.

conference. See Making a conference call.

Dial the first number and wait until the

person answers.

To decline adding this number, select

Cancel.

Put the first call on hold by pressing

To disable the Add New Number

prompt, check the Don’t ask me this

again box, and then select Cancel.

Send or selecting Hold

Select Add Call

Dial the second number.

W H A T

D O

I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals^CS^Ae^Narch An^Wd ^HD^Eo^Nwnload.

Y O U R P H O N E

NOTE To dial the second number, you can

Receiving a second call (call waiting)

use any of the methods described in

Making calls.

When you are on a call, you can receive a

second call and have separate

conversations with each caller. When the

second call comes in, you hear a call

waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog

box appears. You can do any of the

following to handle the second call:

When the Dial another call prompt

appears, select Yes.

Select Swap

to switch between

the two calls.

•

To place the current call on hold and

answer the new call, press Send or

select Answer.

•

To send the new call to voicemail, select

Ignore.

To send the new call to voicemail and

send the caller a text message, select

Ignore with Text.

NOTE Sending text messages to land-line

phones may not be supported.

To end the active call, press Power/End

•

To hang up the current call and answer

the new call, press Power/End and

then press Send

DID YOU KNOW When you hang up one call,

you can continue your conversation with the

remaining call.

To switch between the original call and

the second call you answered, select

Swap

or press Send

W H A T

D O W H E N I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

^{C A N}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Making a conference call

To end all the calls at once, make sure

the conference is the active call, and

then press Power/End

You can join a total of five other calls in a

conference call, provided that your network

and service plan include 6-way

TIP If you want to hold a separate, “sidebar”

conversation with one of the people on a

conference call, you can extract that call from

the conference. Select Extract Call (the

onscreen button on the far right), and when

the list of callers appears, select the call you

want to extract. The conference call remains

on hold while you speak privately on the

extracted call.

conferencing. Please contact AT&T for

more information. Additional charges may

apply and minutes in your mobile account

may be deducted for each call included in

the conference call.

While the first call is active, make a

second call.

Select Conference

. This joins you

and the two calls in a conference call.

Forwarding all calls

You can forward all your calls to another

telephone number. You can also selectively

forward certain calls (see Forwarding calls

under certain conditions). Please check

with AT&T about availability and pricing of

forwarded calls, as additional charges may

apply.

Press Phone

Press Menu

To add more calls to the conference,

select Hold , dial another number,

Select Options, and then select Call

Preferences.

and then select Conference

to add

the new call.

W H A T

D O

I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals^CS^Ae^Narch An^Wd ^HD^Eo^Nwnload.

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP After you set the number you want to

forward all your calls to, the call forwarding

icon appears in the title bar (see What are all

those icons?). We also recommend that you

call your Centro to confirm that your call

forwarding settings work properly.

TIP To turn off forwarding for all calls, select

Off from the Forward all calls pick list.

Select the Forward all calls pick list.

Forwarding calls under certain conditions

• If the forwarding number appears in

the pick list, select the number.

You can forward calls to another number

when the line is busy, a call is unanswered,

your Centro is off, or you are outside a

coverage area.

• If the forwarding number does not

appear in the pick list, select Edit

Numbers, and then select New.

Enter a forwarding number, including

the area code and country code if

they are different from your mobile

phone number. Select OK.

Press Phone

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Call

Preferences.

Select the number you just entered,

select OK, and then select OK again.

Select the Forward all calls pick list and

select Off.

Select any of the following pick lists:

When busy: Forwards calls if the phone

is busy.

Not answered: Forwards calls if you do

not answer.

W H A T

D O W H E N I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

^{C A N}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Off/No service: Forwards calls when

your Centro is not connected to a

mobile network.

Select Totals from the Record menu.

If the forwarding number appears in the

pick list, select the number. If the

forwarding number does not appear in

the pick list, select Edit Numbers and

then select New. Enter a forwarding

number, and select OK. Select the

number you just entered.

Select OK, and then select OK again.

(Optional) To reset the counters to zero,

select Reset Counters.

Select Done.

How many minutes

have I used?

Entering names and

phone numbers

Press Phone

Select the Call Log

Press Menu

tab.

Contacts is the application in which you

enter information about the people you

want to stay in contact with. You can get to

this info from the Phone application, to dial

phone numbers and create favorites, and

from the Messaging and email

applications, to send messages. When you

H O W M A N Y

U S E D ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search A^Mnd^{I N}D^Uo^Tw^En^Slo^Had^A.^{V E}

Y O U R P H O N E

create a contact, you can also assign a

Do any of the following:

photo and ringtone ID to that contact, so

you know when they call you.

Add a caller ID photo: Select the

Picture box. (See Assigning a caller ID

photo for more info.)

Adding a contact

Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the

Ringtone pick list. (See Assigning a

caller ID ringtone for more info.)

Press Phone

Select the Contacts

Press Menu

tab.

Insert a pause when dialing a

number: Enter a comma ( , ) between

digits in a phone number to insert a

one-second pause. To add a two-second

pause, enter a p.

Select New Contact from the Record

menu.

Use the 5-way

to move between

fields as you enter info.

Display a number pad that waits for

you to enter a number: Enter a w

between digits in a phone number,

where you want the prompt to appear.

When the number is dialed, the Extra

Digits button appears in the active call

screen. When you select this button,

the digits following the w are

automatically dialed.

Place the entry in a category or mark

it private: Select Details. (See Working

with private entries for more info.)

DID YOU KNOW If you add a symbol at the

beginning of a contact’s last name, such as

#Smith, the contact appears at the top of your

contact list.

Add a note to an entry: Select Note

E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Display additional fields for this

contact: Select Plus

Select Edit, make changes to the entry

as necessary, and then select Done.

After you enter all the information,

select Done.

Assigning a caller ID photo

Press Phone

TIP Import contacts from your SIM card

quickly and easily. In the Contacts list, press

Menu and then select Import from SIM from

the Record menu.

Select the Contacts

tab.

Open the contact you want to add the

photo to (see Viewing or changing

contact information).

Select Edit.

Viewing or changing contact information

Select the Picture box and do one of

the following:

Press Phone

Select the Contacts

tab.

• Select Camera, take a photo, and

then press Center

photo to this contact.

Begin entering one of the following for

the contact you want to view or edit:

to add the

• First name (JOH for John)

• Last name (SMI for Smith)

• Select Photos and select an existing

photo that you want to assign to this

contact.

• First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

Select the name of the entry you want

to open.

TIP To edit the entries on your SIM card, you

must either import them into Contacts or

press Applications, select SIM Book, and

edit them in the phone book on your SIM card.

N A M E S

P H O N E N U M B E R S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^EM^Na^Tn^Eu^Ra^Il^Ns^GSearch An^Ad^ND^Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Select the Contacts

tab.

To open the contact entry for editing,

select the name of the contact to whom

you want to give a caller ID ringtone

(see Viewing or changing contact

information).

Select Edit.

Select the Ringtone pick list and select

a tone for this contact entry.

Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW If you assign pictures to your

contacts in Microsoft Outlook or

Palm^®Desktop software and you install the

desktop software from the Getting Started

CD, the pictures are automatically added to

your contact entries on your Centro when you

sync. If you use third-party synchronization

software, picture sync may not be supported.

Check with the software developer for

information.

Select Done.

TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire

category of contacts. For example, use a

special ringtone for categories such as Family,

Work, or Golf Buddies. In the Contacts list,

select the category pick list in the upper-left

corner and select Edit Categories. Select the

category, and then select Edit. Select the

ringtone on the Edit Category screen.

Assigning a caller ID ringtone

Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is

calling before you even look at your Centro.

This is a great way to identify calls from

important people in your life and to screen

calls that you’d prefer not to answer.

Press Phone

E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Customizing Contacts

Deleting a contact

Press Phone

Select the Contacts

Press Menu

Select the Contacts

tab.

Highlight the contact you want to

delete.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Select Delete Contact from the Record

menu, and then select OK.

Set any of the following options:

Remember Last Category: Sets

whether Contacts opens to the last

category you selected.

Creating a business card for beaming

Create a new contact and enter your

own business card info.

Show SIM Phonebook: Sets whether

SIM Phonebook appears as an option in

the category pick list. When you check

this box, you can view entries in the

phone book on your SIM card.

Open the contact entry containing your

business card info.

Press Menu

Select Business Card on the Record

menu.

Ask to add unknown phone numbers

after calls: Sets whether you are

prompted to add phone numbers that

are not in your Contacts list after a call.

You can add unknown numbers to an

existing contact or create a new contact

entry.

TIP After you create your business card, you

can beam it to another device with an IR

port—provided the device supports beaming

with Palm OS^®devices. Go to Contacts or to

the Main tab in the Phone application, open

the Record menu, and then select Beam

Business Card.

List By: Sets whether the Contacts list

is sorted by last name or company

name.

N A M E S

P H O N E N U M B E R S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^EM^Na^Tn^Eu^Ra^Il^Ns^GSearch An^Ad^ND^Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Viewing your SIM Phonebook

Defining favorite

buttons

Press Phone

Select the Contacts

Press Menu

tab.

You can set an unlimited number of favorite

buttons for quick access to the following

common tasks:

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Make sure the Show SIM Phonebook

box is checked.

•

Dialing a phone number (speed-dial)

Opening an application

Select OK.

In the Contacts list, select the category

pick list at the top of the screen and

select SIM Phonebook.

Accessing a web page

Addressing a message (text, MMS, or

email)

•

Accessing voicemail (preset on your

Centro)

TIP If you imported contacts from your SIM

card to Contacts, you may want to uncheck

the Show SIM Phonebook box to avoid

seeing duplicate entries.

TIP The predefined Bill Balance and My

Minutes favorites are AT&T services. If you

have questions about these services, please

contact AT&T customer service.

TIP Need to copy a contact to your phone

book on your SIM card? In Contacts, select

the contact you want to copy, open the

Record menu, and then select Export to

SIM.

D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Enter a label for the favorite:

• If the entry is for an existing contact,

select Lookup. Enter the last name of

the contact. When the name appears,

select the phone number you want.

Select Add.

• If the entry is for a new contact, enter

the label, press Down , and enter

the number.

DID YOU KNOW If you’re upgrading from a

Centro 600/650/680/700p/755p, most of your

favorites should transfer from your old Centro

along with your other info. However, you may

need to rearrange the order in which your

favorites appear by opening the Record menu

and then selecting Organize Favorites. For

more info about upgrading, see Upgrading

from another PalmOS^®by ACCESS device.

You can define additional digits to dial,

such as a password or extension.

Creating a speed-dial favorite button

Press Phone

Select the Favorites

Press Menu

Insert a pause when dialing a number:

tab.

• Enter a comma ( , ) between digits in

a phone number to insert a

one-second pause.

Select New Favorite on the Record

menu.

• To add a two-second pause, enter a p.

• To enter a pause for user input, enter

a w followed by the extra digits you

D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

want to dial. To dial these numbers,

Select the Type pick list and select

Application, Message, Email, or Web

Link.

select the Extra Digits button that

appears in Active Call View (see What

can I do when I’m on a call?).

Enter a label for the favorite and enter

any other necessary information on

the screen.

(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.

KEY TERM Quick Key A letter that you can

press and hold to activate a favorite from any

tab in the Phone app. For example, create a

speed-dial button for your mother’s number

and enter the letter M for “Mom” as the

Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go

to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your

Centro dials the number.

(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.

Select OK.

TIP When creating a Message or Email

favorite, you can enter multiple addresses;

simply separate each address with a comma.

This is an easy way to send messages to a

group of people.

Select OK.

Editing a favorite button

DID YOU KNOW You can assign a special

ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller

ID ringtone for details.

Press Phone

Select the Favorites

tab.

Highlight the favorite button you want to

edit.

Creating other types of favorite buttons

Press Menu

Press Phone

Select the Favorites

Press Menu

Select Edit Favorite on the Record

menu.

tab.

After you make your changes, select

OK.

Select New Favorite on the Record

menu.

D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Using a hands-free

TIP To arrange your favorites, open the Record

menu and select Organize Favorites.

Highlight the favorite you want to move, and

then press and hold Option + Up or Down to

move the button to another position. Select

Done.

device

If you need to use your phone while driving

and this is safe and permitted in your area,

use a phone headset or car kit (sold

separately) for hands-free operation. Using

a hands-free device also makes it easy to

check your calendar, look up contact info,

take notes, and use other features during a

call. You can also listen to stereo music or

audio on your stereo headset or car

speakers.

Deleting a favorite button

TIP Some favorites, such as voicemail, cannot

be deleted. If a favorite can’t be deleted, the

Delete button does not appear on the screen.

Press Phone

Select the Favorites

tab.

Your Centro is compatible with the

following types of hands-free devices that

are sold separately:

Highlight the favorite button you want to

delete.

Press Menu

•

Most wired headsets and car kits with a

2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)

Select Edit Favorite on the Record

menu.

•

Wireless headsets and car kits enabled

with Bluetooth^®1.1 or 1.2 wireless

technology

Select Delete.

Select OK.

TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/

300 is not compatible with your Centro.

D E V I C E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Se^Ua^Src^Ih^{N G}And ^HD^Aow^{N D}nl^So^-a^Fd^R. ^{E E}

Y O U R P H O N E

Check the specifications for your

Once you set up a partnership with a

hands-free device to confirm compatibility. Bluetooth hands-free device, you can

When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the communicate with that device whenever it

product is compatible with your Centro. To is turned on and within range. Bluetooth

view a list of compatible Bluetooth

hands-free devices, go to go.palm.com/

centro-att/.

range is up to 30 feet in optimum

environmental conditions. Performance

and range may be reduced by physical

obstacles, radio interference from nearby

electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP To listen to music in stereo, you can

purchase the Palm 2-in-1 Stereo Headset. If

you want to use a stereo headset with a

3.5mm connector, you need to purchase a

stereo adapter. Visit go.palm.com/centro-att/

for more info on audio accessories.

TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience

poor microphone performance, your headset

may be incompatible with your Centro.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your

hands-free device to accept a Bluetooth

connection. See the documentation that

came with your hands-free device for

instructions.

Connecting to a Bluetooth^®hands-free

device

KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for

example, your Centro and a hands-free

device—that can connect because each

device finds the same passkey on the other

device. Once you form a partnership with a

device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to

connect with that device again. Partnership is

also known as paired relationship, pairing,

trusted device, and trusted pair.

Press Applications

and select

Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth

icon in the title bar.

Select Bluetooth On.

NOTE The Bluetooth icon changes from

gray to blue to let you know that Bluetooth

technology is turned on.

U S I N G

H A N D S - F R E E

Download fro^Dm^EW^{V I}w^Cw^E.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Follow the onscreen instructions to

create a partnership with the specific

hands-free device. When prompted,

enter a passkey.

IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices

have a predefined passkey. If your device

has a predefined passkey, you can find it in

the documentation for that device. Other

devices provide a screen where you enter

a passkey that you make up. In either case,

you must use the same passkey on both

your Centro and your hands-free device.

We recommend that, where possible, you

make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric

characters (letters and numerals only) to

improve the security of your Centro. The

longer the passkey, the more difficult it is

for the passkey to be deciphered.

(Optional) Enter a device name that

identifies your Centro when it is

discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

NOTE Use the same device name for all

your Bluetooth connections. If you change

the device name, you need to recreate any

partnerships you have already created.

Select Setup Devices.

Select Hands-free Setup.

After you finish setting up the device,

select Done to return to Trusted

Devices View.

NOTE For some car kits, you need to

initiate a Bluetooth connection from your

Centro to complete the partnership

process. To do this, highlight the car kit in

Trusted Devices View, press Menu

and then select Connect.

D E V I C E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Se^Ua^Src^Ih^{N G}And ^HD^Aow^{N D}nl^So^-a^Fd^R. ^{E E}

Y O U R P H O N E

(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free

features by pressing the multifunction

button (MFB) on the hands-free device.

TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free

device and you want to return to the earpiece

or a wired headset during a call, select Cancel

Bluetooth in Active Call View. To return the

call to the hands-free device, open the

Options menu and select Connect

Bluetooth.

You can tell that the connection is

successful when you see a light-blue

headset icon in the title bar of the Phone

application. You can now use your Centro

with the Bluetooth hands-free device.

The features of your hands-free device vary

by model. Check the documentation for

your hands-free device for details about

these features. Your Centro can support

the following actions, provided that your

hands-free device also supports them:

Using a Bluetooth hands-free device

After you create a partnership with your

Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it

on within range (up to 30 feet), the Centro

automatically routes all calls to the

hands-free device instead of to the

earpiece on your Centro. When a call

comes in, your Centro rings and the

hands-free device beeps. Even if you

answer the call on your Centro, the call

goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer

to route calls to the earpiece on your

Centro, you can change the settings on

your Centro to do this; see Customizing

advanced settings for your hands-free

device for details.

•

Dial a call

Answer an incoming call

Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting

call

•

Place a call on hold and answer a

call-waiting call

•

Hang up a single call

Transfer an outgoing call from the

earpiece on your Centro to the

hands-free device

•

Ignore an incoming call

U S I N G

H A N D S - F R E E

Download fro^Dm^EW^{V I}w^Cw^E.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

•

Redial the last number you called from

the hands-free device

To choose between the earpiece on

your Centro and your hands-free

device on a call-by-call basis: Uncheck

the Always route calls to handsfree

box. When the phone rings, you can

answer the call with your hands-free

device by pressing the multifunction

button on your hands-free device, or you

can answer the call with the earpiece on

your Centro by using the controls on

your Centro (see Receiving calls).

DID YOU KNOW If you have more than one

Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you

connected to becomes the active device. To

switch between devices, turn off the active

device before you try to connect to the other

device.

Customizing advanced settings for your

hands-free device

Select Done.

You can set whether your hands-free

device automatically answers calls,

provided the device supports this feature.

Customizing phone

settings

Press Applications

Prefs

and select

Select Hands-free.

Do one of the following:

DID YOU KNOW

You can download any

To send all calls to your hands-free

device: Check the Always route calls

to handsfree box. Select the Auto

answer pick list and select whether you

want your hands-free device to

compatible ringtone directly to your Centro

(see Downloading files from a web page). You

can also download ringtones to your computer

and then email them to your Centro.

automatically answer incoming calls and

how quickly it answers.

P H O N E S E T T I N G S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals ^CS^Uea^Sr^Tc^Oh^MA^In^Zd^{I N}D^Gownload.

Y O U R P H O N E

Selecting ringtones

ring to play softly and then increase to

full volume the longer it rings.

You can set various tones for various types

of incoming calls.

Select a ringtone from the pick list to

identify each of the following:

Press Phone

Known Caller: An incoming call from

someone in your Contacts or Favorites.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Sound

Unknown Caller: An incoming call from

someone identified by caller ID who is

not in your Contacts or Favorites. This

includes callers who have blocked their

caller ID.

Preferences.

Select the Application pick list and

select Ring Tones.

Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW

You can assign a ringtone to a

contact or to an entire category of contacts.

Creating and managing ringtones

You can also record sounds and use them

as ringtones.

Select the Volume pick list and select

the volume level.

Press Phone

Select the Vibrate pick list and select

when you want your Centro to vibrate

for an incoming call.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Sound

Preferences.

(Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring

tone volume box if you do not want the

Select Manage.

C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E

Download fro^Sm^{E T}W^Tw^{I N}w^G.S^Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Do one of the following:

• To record a sound, select New.

• To play a sound, select it with the

5-way

• To delete a sound, highlight it and

press Backspace

• To send a sound, highlight it and

select Send.

Select Done twice.

Select the Volume pick list and select

the volume level.

TIP You can also create a new sound by

selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.

Select the Vibrate pick list and select

when you want your Centro to vibrate

for a phone alert.

Selecting Phone alert tones

Select an alert tone from the pick list for

each of the following:

You can set various tones for various types

of alerts.

Voicemail Alert: Plays when you have

Press Phone

new voicemail.

Press Menu

Coverage in/out: Plays when you move

into or out of a coverage area.

Select Options, and then select Sound

Preferences.

Select Done.

Select the Application pick list and

select Phone Alerts.

Adjusting the call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume button on the side of your Centro

to adjust the call volume.

P H O N E S E T T I N G S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals ^CS^Uea^Sr^Tc^Oh^MA^In^Zd^{I N}D^Gownload.

Y O U R P H O N E

•

To increase the volume, press the upper

half of the Volume button.

Press Phone

Press Menu

To decrease the volume, press the

lower half of the Volume button.

Select Options, and then select Phone

Display Options.

Set any of the following options:

Wallpaper: Sets the wallpaper that

appears on the Main tab in the Phone

application. To change the wallpaper,

select the thumbnail image and then

select an image to use as wallpaper.

Volume

Side button

DID YOU KNOW

You can also set the

background for Agenda View in Calendar. See

Customizing display options for your calendar

for details.

Adjusting ringer volume

When a call is not in progress and music is

not playing, press the Volume button on

the side of your Centro to adjust the ringer

volume, and then press the Side button to

confirm your selection.

Fade: Adjusts the intensity level of the

wallpaper image.

Typing…: Sets whether typing in the

Main tab in the Phone app displays the

Dial Pad and enters numbers you want

to dial, or whether it displays the

Contacts tab and starts a contacts

search.

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone

application

Phone Display Options let you customize

the appearance and entry mode of the

Main tab in the Phone application.

C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E

Download fro^Sm^{E T}W^Tw^{I N}w^G.S^Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Setting your dialing preferences

TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts

search option, you can still enter a phone

number from the Main tab in the Phone app. If

you start typing digit keys that can be a phone

number, the device automatically switches to

the Dial Pad and looks for the phone number.

Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix

to your phone numbers. For example, you

can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit

phone numbers. You can add a different

prefix based on the length of the phone

number.

Show Calendar event: Sets whether

the current event from the Calendar

application appears in the Main tab in

the Phone app. When this option is

enabled, you can then select this event

to jump to the Calendar app.

Press Phone

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Dial

Preferences.

Set any of the following options:

Dialing from North America: Formats

phone numbers using North American

conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).

Default View: Sets the tab that appears

when you press Phone

Always dial +1 in front of the area

code: Adds a +1 in front of 10-digit

phone numbers. This option is available

only when Dialing from North America

is enabled.

To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to

7-digit numbers. For example, enter

your own area code to automatically add

your area code when you dial local

numbers.

Select OK.

P H O N E S E T T I N G S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals ^CS^Uea^Sr^Tc^Oh^MA^In^Zd^{I N}D^Gownload.

Y O U R P H O N E

To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a

Using TTY

prefix to numbers that are only six, five,

or four numerals long. For example, if all

the phone numbers in your office have

the 408 area code and a 555 exchange,

followed by a 4-digit extension, select 4

and enter the prefix 408555. To call a

colleague, simply dial your colleague’s

4-digit extension; your Centro

automatically dials the rest and makes

the call. You can also create contact

entries with just the extension number

and then dial the number from your

Contacts list.

A TTY (also known as TDD or text

telephone) is a telecommunications device

that allows people who are deaf or hard of

hearing, or who have speech or language

disabilities, to communicate by telephone.

Your Centro is compatible with select TTY

devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD

machine to your Centro through the

headset jack, but you cannot use your

headset jack with a headset while this

mode is enabled. Please check with the

manufacturer of your TTY device for

connectivity information and to ensure that

the TTY device supports digital wireless

transmission.

Select OK.

Manually selecting the wireless network

To use TTY, you may need to make

additional arrangements with AT&T. Please

contact the AT&T customer service

department for more information.

When traveling outside the U.S.,

depending on SIM card setting, you may be

able to search for other wireless network

services in your current location.

Press Phone

Select the Dial Pad

tab.

Press Menu

Enter #*889 (TTY).

From the Options menu, select Select

Network.

Press Send

Select another network, if available.

Select OK.

C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E

Download fro^Sm^{E T}W^Tw^{I N}w^G.S^Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

When a message appears indicating

that TTY is enabled, select OK. To

disable TTY, repeat these steps.

AT&T

Your phone is on and you are in

an AT&T coverage area. If you

are outside a coverage area, “No

Service” appears instead. When

you turn off your phone, Phone

Off appears.

TIP A red T appears at the top of the Phone

screen to indicate that TTY is enabled.

Call forwarding is active.

Your phone is on. The bars

display the signal strength. The

stronger the signal, the more

bars that appear. If you are

outside a coverage area, no bars

appear.

What are all those

icons?

You can monitor the status of several items

using icons in the title bar in the Phone

application:

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE network is within range,

but you are not actively

transmitting data. You can still

make and receive calls.

W H A T A R E

T H O S E I C O N S ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And D^Aow^{L L}nload.

Y O U R P H O N E

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE data connection is active.

You may not be able to receive

calls when you are actively

transmitting data. If you make a

call, the data transmission is

automatically interrupted, and

you must manually resume the

data connection when you end

the call.

This icon replaces the Bluetooth

icon when your Centro is

connected to a Bluetooth

hands-free device. This icon

appears in dark blue when a call

is in progress and in light blue

when a call is not in progress.

This icon replaces the Bluetooth

icon when your Centro is

connected to your computer

using a dial-up networking (DUN)

connection. See Connecting your

computer to the Internet through

your Centro™.

You have new voicemail

messages. You can select this

icon to retrieve your messages.

You have a new alert, such as a

Calendar alarm or a new text

message. To view the alert,

Your battery is partially drained.

When the battery drains to 20%

of its capacity, the icon changes

from blue to red. At 10% of its

capacity, you begin to receive

warning messages, and at 5% of

its capacity, the Centro beeps (if

the Ringer switch is set to Sound

On) and the icon changes from

red to clear.

press and hold Center

select the icon. See Viewing and

using the alerts.

The Bluetooth wireless

technology icon appears in gray

when this feature is off, in blue

when this feature is on, and in

reverse blue when your Centro is

communicating with another

Bluetooth device.

W H A T

A L L

I C O N S ?

^{A R E}Down^Tlo^Ha^Od^Sfr^Eom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O N E

Your battery is being charged.

The lightning bolt turns from red

to green when the battery is fully

charged and your Centro remains

connected to the charger.

You are available for Push to Talk

calls. Your Ringer switch is set to

Sound On and you

automatically hear PTT calls.

Your Ringer switch is set to

Your battery is fully charged and

your Centro is not connected to

the charger.

Sound Off

. When a PTT call

comes in, you get an alert. You

can choose whether to answer

or ignore the PTT call.

You have new text or multimedia

messages. The number next to

the icon indicates the number of

unread messages in your Inbox.

You can select this icon to

You can make PTT calls, but you

cannot receive them.

You cannot make or receive PTT

calls.

retrieve your messages.

You have a pending PTT invitation

and have not yet responded.

You have new email messages.

The number next to the icon

indicates the number of unread

messages in your Inbox. If you

set up multiple email accounts

on your Centro, this number

reflects only the account that you

most recently accessed. You can

select this icon to retrieve your

messages.

W H A T A R E

T H O S E I C O N S ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And D^Aow^{L L}nload.

Y O U R P H O N E

KEY TERM GPRS (General Packet Radio

Service) A mobile connectivity technology

that provides persistent data connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

KEY TERM EDGE (Enhanced Data rate for GSM

Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS

that delivers data speeds that are up to three

times faster than standard GPRS connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

DID YOU KNOW You can tap the Bluetooth

icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless

features on and off.

TIP To display the remaining battery power,

tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.

W H A T

A L L

I C O N S ?

^{A R E}Down^Tlo^Ha^Od^Sfr^Eom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Your email and other

messages

You already know how efficient email and messaging are for

staying in touch. Now your Palm^®Centro^™smart device brings

you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the

ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and

colleagues anywhere you can access the AT&T data network.

You can send and receive attachments as well. And keep the

Messaging app in mind for when you need to send a short text

message to a mobile phone number—especially handy when

you’re in a meeting that’s running late.

Benefits

•

Access email on the go

•

Save messages from your

computer to view at a convenient

time

•

Send and receive photos, sound

files, Word and Excel files, and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

The VersaMail^®application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

Xpress Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 12

Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Which email

application should I

use?

KEY TERM Email provider The service you

use to send and receive email. Your email

provider’s name appears between the @

symbol and the dot in your email address.

Gmail, for example, is an email provider; so

are AOL and Earthlink.

KEY TERM Email application It’s not an email

provider, but an application on your Centro,

that gives you a way to view and manage

email. An email application just transfers

messages from an account that you have

already set up with a provider.

Your Centro includes two email

applications: the VersaMail^®application

(called Email in Applications view) and the

Xpress Mail application. You can access

both personal and work email from Xpress

Mail. You can also access web-based

email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the

web browser on your Centro.

NOTE You must activate data services on

your AT&T account before you can use

email on your Centro.

E M A I L

U S E ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com.^WA^Hll^IM^{C H}anuals Se^Aar^Pc^Ph^LA^{I C}n^Ad^TD^Io^Ow^Nn^Slo^Ha^Od.^{U L D}

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Then choose this app…

If you want to…

Access an email account that’s set up on your Mac

computer

Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail Plus

Access email from an existing account without extra

software or account sign-up

Access Contacts on your device to address email

messages

Use the AT&T Xpress Mail website to check email from

multiple email addresses, from any computer connected

to the Internet

Access email from up to three email accounts

Access email from up to eight email accounts

Work with email messages when you’re not connected to

the Internet (for example, when you’re on a plane)

Access your corporate directory to address email

messages

Sync your email and organizer info with your company’s

Exchange server

W H I C H E M A I L

S H O U L D

Dow^Anl^Po^Pa^Ld^If^Cro^Am^{T I}W^{O N}ww.Somanua^Uls^S.c^Eo^?m. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Then choose this app…

If you want to…

Push your email and organizer information from your

company’s Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

Sync your email with your company’s Domino server

Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while

sending and receiving email

Use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) while sending and

receiving messages

E M A I L

U S E ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com.^WA^Hll^IM^{C H}anuals Se^Aar^Pc^Ph^LA^{I C}n^Ad^TD^Io^Ow^Nn^Slo^Ha^Od.^{U L D}

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

The VersaMail^®

application

Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI

server.

If your email provider is listed in the

following table, skip to Setting up

VersaMail to work with common

providers.

Before you can use VersaMail, you need to

enter your email account settings. If you

have multiple email accounts, you must

enter settings for each email account.

Adelphia

Airmail.net

AOL

Gmail

HughesNet

Juno

After you enter your email account

settings, see the User Guide for the

VersaMail Application on the Getting

Started CD for info on sending and

receiving messages and customizing your

VersaMail settings.

Apple.Mac

Mail.com

Mediacom

NetZero

AT&T (mMode

& Worldnet)

Bell South

Qwest

(select areas

How do I get started?

Cablevision

Charter

RCN

If either of the following is true, read the

User Guide for the VersaMail

SBC

(select areas)

Application on the Getting Started CD:

Comcast

CompuServe

Concentric

Covad

Speakeasy

Sprint

• You used the VersaMail application on

your previous Palm OS^®device, and

you want to transfer those settings to

your Centro.

USA.net

Verizon DSL

Yahoo!

• You plan to use VersaMail to access

an email account on a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus

Cox

(East,Central, &

West)

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

If your email provider’s name is not

listed, you need to obtain the following

info from your system administrator or

ISP, and then skip to Setting up

VersaMail to work with other providers:

• Mail protocol: POP, IMAP, or Outlook

Mail (EAS)

• Incoming and outgoing mail server

names, such as mail.myisp.com

Press Menu

Select Accounts, and then select

Account Setup.

• Incoming and outgoing mail server

port numbers, such as 110 (incoming

POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25

(outgoing POP or IMAP)

Select New.

Enter the email address for your email

account. Your email address includes

your username, which usually appears

before the @ symbol in your email

address.

• (If necessary) Security settings: APOP,

ESMTP, SSL

Setting up VersaMail to work with

common providers

Press Applications

and select

If this is the first time you are setting up

VersaMail, you are asked if you want to

continue with account setup after you

open the application. Select Continue

and go to step 6.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

In the Password field, enter your email

account password.

IMPORTANT Do not select HotSync on

this screen. Doing so may prevent the

VersaMail application from working

correctly.

If the VersaMail application can obtain

your email account settings based on

your username and password, the Next

button changes to Done. Select Done.

NOTE If the Next button does not change

to Done, you need to follow the next

procedure, Setting up VersaMail to work

with other providers.

TIP To enter settings for another email

account, open the Accounts menu and select

Account Setup.

Press Menu

Select Accounts, and then select

Account Setup.

Setting up VersaMail to work with other

providers

Press Applications

and select

If this is the first time you are setting up

VersaMail, you are asked if you want to

continue with account setup after you

open the application. Select Continue

and go to step 5.

Select New.

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Enter the email address for your email

account. Your email address includes

your username, which usually appears

before the @ symbol in your email

address.

10 Enter the username you use to access

your email.

TIP Your username can be either the part of

your email address appearing before the @

symbol or your entire email address. Check

with your email provider if you are not sure

what username to enter.

In the Password field, enter your email

account password.

Select Next.

Select the Mail Type pick list, and then

select POP, IMAP, or Outlook Mail

(EAS) (based on the info you received

from your system administrator or ISP).

11 Enter the names of your incoming and

outgoing mail servers.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

TIP You can also select Advanced to set more

options for incoming and outgoing messages.

13 Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW

Advanced settings include the

Reset Advanced Settings button. You can

select this button to reset your advanced

settings to their initial state. This is useful

when you want to restore your initial settings

but you can’t remember what they were.

DID YOU KNOW Your incoming mail server is

also called your POP, IMAP, or Outlook Mail

(EAS) server; your outgoing mail server is also

called your SMTP server.

Creating and sending messages

From the Inbox, select New.

12 Do one of the following:

Begin entering one of the following for

the addressee:

Finish setup: Select Done to finish the

setup and go to the Inbox of the

account you set up, where you can

begin getting and sending email.

• Email address

• First name

• Last name

Test settings (POP and EAS accounts

only): Select Test Settings to test

settings for this account.

TIP If you enter address info that matches one

or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays

the matching contacts. To accept a

suggestion, select the correct contact. To

send to a different address, keep entering the

email address or name.

Set additional mail options: If your

system administrator or ISP provided

port numbers or security settings,

select Advanced, and then enter those

settings.

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Enter the subject and message text.

DID YOU KNOW

VersaMail makes up to five

attempts to send a message; if it is still not

successful, an alert message appears and you

must try to manually send the message again.

TIP To move between fields, press Up or

Down on the 5-way.

Select one of the following:

Adding attachments to your messages

Send: Connects and sends all

You can attach several types of files to your

email messages.

messages immediately. If the message

cannot be sent for any reason, the

message is stored in your Outbox.

TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in

the Attachments box, and then select

Delete.

Outbox: Puts the message in the

Outbox to send later.

Drafts: Saves the message so you can

continue working on it at another time.

Attaching photos and videos

Create the message to which you want

to attach the photo or video.

On the New Message screen, select

the red paper clip

icon in the

upper-right corner.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

From the Type pick list, select Photo/

From the Type pick list, select Sounds.

Video.

TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear

in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You

can use these ringtones on your phone, but

you cannot send them as attachments.

Select the ringtone you want, and then

select Insert.

Select Done.

Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

PDF files

On the Select Media screen, select the

Album pick list to go to the album

containing the photo or video you want,

and then check the box to the left of the

photo or video.

Create the message to which you want

to attach the file.

On the New Message screen, select

the red paper clip

upper-right corner.

icon in the

Select Done.

TIP To attach more than one file to a message,

repeat steps 3 and 4.

From the Type pick list, select

Documents.

Select the file you want on the

Documents screen.

Attaching ringtones

Create the message to which you want

to attach the ringtone.

Select Done.

On the New Message screen, select

the red paper clip

icon in the

upper-right corner.

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Attaching other types of files

Create the message to which you want

to attach the item.

On the New Message screen, select

the red paper clip

icon in the

upper-right corner.

From the Type pick list, select the type

of file to attach—for example, Address,

Appointment, or Memo/Text.

Select the item you want from the list in

the Type box.

Select Done.

Receiving and viewing messages

From any mailbox, select Get or Get &

Send.

From the Inbox, select the message you

want to view.

If a large incoming message is

truncated, select More

TIP A circular arrow in the lower-right corner of

the Inbox revolves to indicate background

activity, such as downloading messages.

TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll

arrows at the top of the screen to view the

previous or next message.

Select Done.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Replying to or forwarding messages

From any folder, open the message with

the attachment you want to view.

Messages with downloaded

attachments appear with a paper clip

icon to the left of the message icon.

When you respond to messages, you can

select whether to include the original text

(see Customizing your email settings).

DID YOU KNOW The VersaMail application

TIP If an attachment is not downloaded

because it is larger than your maximum

message size, the paper clip icon does not

appear, and the attachment is not displayed at

the bottom of the message screen. Select

More to download and display any

sends all messages as plain text only, with all

HTML tags stripped, even if you are

forwarding or replying to a message that was

originally received as HTML.

From the Inbox or another folder, open

the message you want to respond to.

attachments. However, if the attachment is

larger than the limit set by IT or by the email

provider, the attachment is not downloaded.

In Message View, select Reply. Select

whether to reply to just the sender or to

reply to both the sender and all

Select the attachment name at the

bottom of the message screen to view

it in the default viewer on your Centro.

addressees on the message.

Enter your reply.

Select Send.

TIP You can also select the folder icon to the

left of the attachment name to open a menu

of tasks you can do with the attachment,

including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on

the attachment file type; Save to card to save

the attachment to an expansion card; or select

Viewer to select the application you want to

use to view the attachment.

Viewing attachments

There are a number of attachment types

you can open with the built-in software

on your Centro (for example, Microsoft

Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files;

ringtones; and photos).

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

100

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

When you finish with the attachment,

select Done to return to the

Attachments dialog box.

•

To quickly switch between folders in list

view, select the folder pick list at the

top of the screen and select the desired

folder.

NOTE If there is no Done button, press

Applications and select Email to

return to the account’s Inbox.

Deleting selected messages from the

Inbox

When you delete a message from the

Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.

Managing your messages

The status icons that appear near the

messages in your Inbox indicate the

following:

Select the bullet next to the icon of each

message that you want to delete. To

select adjacent messages, drag the

stylus so that it touches the bullet to the

left of each message. Lift the stylus and

drag again to select more adjacent

messages.

The message is unread when the

subject appears in bold.

The message includes an

attachment.

Press Menu

The message includes a meeting

invitation.

Select Delete on the Message menu.

This message has high priority.

If a confirmation dialog box appears,

select OK to confirm the deletion.

You can rearrange the message list to

make it easier to find and view messages.

TIP To delete a single message, select the

envelope icon next to the message, and then

select Delete from the list.

•

In the Inbox, select Sort, and then

select one of the following: By Subject,

By Sender, By Size, or By Date.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Deleting messages by date

DID YOU KNOW

If you assigned VersaMail to a

You can quickly delete a group of

messages by selecting a range of dates.

quick button, you can press that button

repeatedly to switch between your email

accounts.

Press Menu

Select Delete Old on the Message

Customizing your email settings

menu.

You can customize the VersaMail settings

for each individual email account on your

Centro. The preferences you set apply only

to the email account you are currently

viewing. If you have multiple accounts,

configure each account separately.

Select the folder and a date range for

the messages you want to delete.

Select OK.

If a confirmation dialog box appears,

select OK to confirm the deletion.

You can set up a schedule to automatically

retrieve email messages; set preferences

for how and when messages are retrieved;

add a signature to an outgoing message;

and more. For complete information on all

the email settings you can customize, see

the User Guide for the VersaMail

TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open

the Message menu and select Empty Trash.

Switching accounts

If you create more than one email account

in VersaMail, you need to switch from

account to account to get, send, and

otherwise manage the messages in each

account.

Application on the Getting Started CD.

Scheduling Auto Sync

Press Menu

You can set up VersaMail to automatically

download new email messages to your

Centro with the Auto Sync feature.

Select Accounts, and then select an

account.

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

102

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Select the Start Time and End Time

boxes, and then select the hour, the

minute, and AM or PM to enter the time

for the first and last Auto Sync to take

place. Select OK.

TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync

schedule for each email account. This feature

may not work with email accounts that require

VPN connection.

Select the days you want the schedule

to be active. You can choose any

number of days, but you can set up only

one schedule for each email account.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Select Auto Sync.

Select OK, and then select Get Mail.

TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync

and select Get Mail, only new messages are

retrieved during Auto Sync.

Viewing the Activity Log

The Activity Log lists ongoing and

completed background transactions, such

as downloading email, between the server

and your email account.

Check the Auto-sync box.

Select the Every pick list and select the

time interval, from 5 minutes to

12 hours.

From the Inbox, press Menu

Select Options, and then select View

Activity Log.

NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,

you may need to recharge your Centro

battery more often.

Select a listed action.

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Do either of the following:

Setting preferences for getting messages

• To cancel an ongoing action, select

Stop. If the action has already been

completed, Stop does not appear.

From any mailbox screen, press

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

• To view the details of a completed

action, select Details.

Select Incoming.

Select Done.

Selecting alert tones

When you schedule Auto Sync for a given

account, you can choose a sound—such as

a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you

know when new email arrives.

From any mailbox screen, press

Set any of the following preferences,

and then select OK.

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Get: Indicates whether to get message

subjects only or entire messages.

Select Alerts.

Check the Alert me of new mail box.

Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want

to see a dialog box for selecting

subjects only or entire messages each

time you retrieve email. If the box is

unchecked, messages are retrieved

according to the option you select in the

Get pick list.

Select the Alert Sound pick list, and

then select a sound. Your Centro plays a

brief demo of the sound.

Select OK.

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

104

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Unread messages (IMAP accounts

only): Downloads only unread mail to

your Centro. If you don’t check this box

and you select Get & Send, all the

messages on your mail server are

downloaded to your Inbox, including

messages you’ve read.

including attachments. The maximum

message size that you can retrieve is

60KB for the body text and

approximately 5MB of total data for any

attachments.

Message Format: Sets the format for

messages you retrieve.

• HTML: Displays messages sent in

HTML format with basic formatting

intact and displays other messages as

plain text.

TIP The POP protocol does not support

retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If

you have a POP email account, VersaMail

downloads all messages regardless of

whether you have read them, and regardless

of whether the Unread messages box is

checked.

• Text: Displays all messages as plain

text, regardless of the format in which

they were sent.

Mail from last: Gets messages sent

within the number of days you specify.

Attaching a signature to a message

You can attach a personal signature, with

info such as your company’s address and

phone numbers, to the bottom of all

messages you send.

Download attachments: Automatically

downloads files attached to email,

except for attachments that exceed the

maximum message size.

From any mailbox screen, press

Maximum message size: Sets the

maximum size of an incoming email

message. Enter the size in kilobytes

(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can

enter any size up to 2,048KB

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

(approximately 2 megabytes [MB]),

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Select Signature.

continues to synchronize with your desktop

software.

Check the Attach Signature box.

Enter your signature information, and

then select OK.

The Exchange server pushes email

messages, Calendar events, meeting

invitations, and updated contact

information it receives onto your Centro.

Likewise, when you create an email

message or event or you update a contact

on your Centro, it can be pushed to the

server.

Working with Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync^®

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync^®works

with the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts

apps on your Centro to directly access

corporate groupware information on a

Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or

Exchange Server 2003. You can

synchronize business email, calendar, and

contact info with the Exchange 2003

server from your Centro without using a

desktop computer.

DID YOU KNOW

Your Centro turns on and an

alert appears whenever you receive a new

message. To save battery life, you can turn

alerts off for your Exchange ActiveSync

account. Go to the account, press Menu,

select Options, and then select Preferences.

Select Alerts, and then uncheck the alert box.

When you create a Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync account in the VersaMail

application, your email, calendar, and

contact info sync directly with the

Exchange server; information does not

sync with the desktop software application

on your computer, such as Microsoft

Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other

information that is stored on your

Pushing email, events, and contacts

The Exchange server pushes email

messages, Calendar events, meeting

invitations, and updated contact

information it receives onto your Centro.

NOTE Find out from your system

administrator if your Exchange server

supports push and has push turned on.

computer, such as tasks and memos,

T H E

A P P L I C A T I O N

^{V E R S A}D^Mo^Aw^In^Lload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

106

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Likewise, when you create an email

message or event or you update a contact

on your Centro, it can be pushed to the

server.

TIP When push is enabled, certain

preferences change for your Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync account only. A new

Auto Sync preference is created, including

Auto Sync and Alerts options. The Advanced

preferences, including Connection and Server

options, are removed.

KEY TERM Push Technology in which a server

automatically delivers new information (such

as new email messages) to a device. The user

does not need to do anything.

Turning off push

When push is enabled, you can turn it off—

for example, to save battery life.

Push from server to Centro happens

automatically as new or changed items

arrive on the server. When you create a

new message, appointment, or contact on

your Centro, the new item is pushed from

your Centro to the server at the following

times:

Open VersaMail and go to your

Exchange ActiveSync account (this is

typically your corporate email account).

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

•

When a server-to-Centro push takes

place

Select Auto Sync, and then do one of

the following:

•

When you select Sync in your Exchange

ActiveSync account to manually retrieve

information

• To switch from push to an Auto Sync

schedule for email, calendar, or

contacts, select the When pick list

and then select any schedule option

except As Items Arrive.

•

At a preset time interval, if neither of

the preceding two events takes place

during that interval—for example, if

neither a server push nor a manual sync

takes place for ten minutes

• To turn off push and manually retrieve

information, uncheck the box next to

the type of information you want to

T H E V E R S A M A I L ^®A P P L I C A T I O N

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

get manually (Mail, Calendar, or

Contacts).

For complete info on using a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync account, see the

User Guide for the VersaMail Application

on the Getting Started CD.

Using Remote Address Lookup

Remote Address Lookup enables you to

retrieve email addresses on your corporate

Exchange server.

Xpress Mail

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Be sure your phone

is on and you are within a coverage area.

Xpress Mail works with your existing

corporate and personal email accounts to

transfer messages to your Centro. You can

add up to three different email accounts in

Xpress Mail to access on your Centro.

Open VersaMail and go to your

Exchange ActiveSync account.

Select New.

On the new message screen, begin

addressing the message. If the name

you want does not appear on the Smart

Setting up Xpress Mail to work with a

personal email account

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your

phone is on and that you are in an area

where a data connection is available. You

can tell a data connection is available when

Addressing list, press Menu

select Options, and then select

Remote Lookup.

Enter text that you want to find on the

server. For example, type “Ste” to

search for a person named Steve.

either a black triangle

or green arrows

appear in the signal-strength icon in

the title bar of the Main tab of the Phone

application.

Select Search. Any names or addresses

on the server that match the characters

you entered are displayed.

When the name you want appears,

select it, and then select Add.

X P R E S S M A I L

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Press Applications

select XpressMail

, and then

11 To begin service with your provider,

select Register.

Select Install Now. If prompted, select 12 When the AT&T Xpress Mail home

Yes to connect to the Internet.

screen appears, select your email

account to go to its Inbox.

Select Download Now, and then select

Yes to begin downloading.

Setting up Xpress Mail to work with a

corporate email account

Select Save, and then select Yes to

accept the application.

Xpress Mail is a self-service option for

accessing your corporate email from your

Centro without support from IT. Using

Xpress Mail with a corporate account also

enables wireless synchronization of

calendar appointments and contacts, as

well as wireless corporate directory

lookup.

Select Reset.

Press Applications

select XpressMail

, and then

Select OK to accept the license

agreement.

Confirm your ten-digit mobile phone

number and press Next.

Select your email provider name, and

then press Next. If your email provider

is not listed, select More to view

additional provider names.

DID YOU KNOW

The Xpress Mail software you

use to access your corporate email is called

the Professional Edition.

NOTE If you select More and your email

provider still does not appear on the list, go

to att.com/wirelessxpressmail.

To use Xpress Mail with your corporate

email account, you must install Xpress Mail

both on your computer and on your Centro.

10 Enter the username and password you

use to access your email account, and

then press Next.

X P R E S S M A I L

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Setting up Xpress Mail on your computer NOTE Jot down your Xpress Mail

username and password exactly as you

enter them. You need this information later

in the Xpress Mail setup process.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need the

following:

•

Your work email address

Click Next.

The type of mail server your company

uses: Microsoft Exchange, Lotus Notes,

or IMAP

Click Download to copy Xpress Mail

desktop software to your computer.

When the File Download dialog box

appears, click Open.

•

The computer you use to access your

corporate email (Internet connection

required)

Click Yes to install Xpress Mail

Professional Edition.

On your computer, open your web

browser.

Follow the onscreen instructions to

finish the installation. On the

Completing the Xpress Mail

Professional Edition Setup Wizard

screen, uncheck Show Readme, and

make sure Run Xpress Mail

Professional Edition is checked. Click

Finish.

Go to xpressmailpe.wireless.att.com

and click Register Now.

Enter all the required info, keeping the

following in mind:

• In the Email Address field, enter the

work email address you want to use

with Xpress Mail.

Enter the Xpress Mail username and

password you made up in step 3, and

then click Next.

• Your Xpress Mail username and

password can be anything you want;

they don’t need to match your email

username and password.

10 Select your company’s mail server from

the list, and then click Next.

11 If you want to access files on your

computer from your Centro, check the

X P R E S S M A I L

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Enable access to documents box, and

then click Finish.

Confirm your ten-digit mobile phone

number and press Next.

Xpress Mail is now installed on your

computer. To access corporate mail on your

Centro using your Xpress Mail account, you

now need to install Xpress Mail on your

Centro.

If prompted, select Yes to connect to

the Internet.

10 Select Work, and then press Next.

11 Select Professional Edition, and then

press Next.

12 Select Register Device, and then press

Setting up Xpress Mail on your Centro

Next.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your

phone is on and that you are in an area

where a data connection is available.

13 Enter the username and password you

selected when you created your Xpress

Mail account on your computer, and

then press Next.

Press Applications

select Xpress Mail

, and then

14 Press Register.

Select Install Now. If prompted, select 15 When the registration process has

Yes to connect to the Internet. finished, press OK.

Select Download Now, and then select 16 When the Account Information screen

Yes to begin downloading.

appears, press Xpress Mail to go to the

Inbox of your account.

Select Save, and then select Yes to

accept the application.

Creating and sending email in Xpress Mail

Select Reset.

NOTE Before you can access your

corporate email, the Xpress Mail desktop

must be installed and running and your

computer must be connected to your mail

server.

Press Applications

select Xpress Mail

, and then

Select OK to accept the license

agreement.

X P R E S S M A I L

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

From the Inbox, select New

Messaging

Enter the addressee’s email address, a

subject, and your message. Separate

recipients’ names with commas (for

example,

janesmith4028@example1.com,

[email protected]).

When your phone is on, icons appear in the

title bar in the Main tab in the Phone

application to indicate whether data

services are available and whether a data

connection is active. Make sure that either

of the following icons appears in the title

Select Send Now to send the email

right away. Select Send to send it later.

(Send is useful if you’re not currently

connected to the Internet.)

bar of the Main tab:

. If you do not

see either of these icons, data services are

not available in your current location and

you cannot exchange multimedia

messages.

TIP If you have trouble sending messages, you

need to enter AT&T’s outgoing mail server

name. Open the Messaging tab in the Xpress

Mail desktop and click Server Setting. In the

Outgoing mail SMTP server field, enter

cwmx.com, and then click OK.

You can use the Messaging application to

exchange brief text messages (SMS) and

multimedia messages (MMS) with other

devices and email addresses that support

these forms of messaging. Before you use

your Centro to send or receive messages,

refer to your service plan for pricing and

availability of messaging services.

For additional detailed instructions on

setting up and using Xpress Mail, visit

att.com/wirelessxpressmail.

DID YOU KNOW

You can address messages to

multiple recipients by separating the

addresses with a comma. If you address a

single message to three people, you will be

billed for three messages.

M E S S A G I N G

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Creating and sending a text message

• If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list

of recent addresses or your Contacts

list, enter the phone number or email

address.

Each text message can have up to

160 characters. Messages with more than

160 characters are automatically split into

several messages. (If you send a text

message to an email address, the email

address is deducted from the

TIP If you see numbers when you expect to

see letters (or the other way around), you

need to turn Option Lock on by pressing

Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option

once.

160-character count.)

DID YOU KNOW

You can page someone to call

TIP Do you need to enter a short code that

contains letters? Use the keyboard to enter it;

just press the letter keys. For example, if the

code is “win01,” press W to enter w, I to enter

i, and so on. No need to figure out the

you by sending them a blank text message.

Press Applications

Messaging

and select

numbers that correspond to the letters

Select New.

Select the To field to address the

message:

NOTE Sending text messages to land-line

phones may not be supported.

• Press Center

. If the recipient’s

name appears in the list of recent

addresses, select it from the list.

Enter your message or select

QuickText

to insert predefined

phrases. To insert emoticons, select

• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,

enter the first initial and last name (no

spaces), and then select the

recipient’s phone number or email

address, depending on where you

want to send the message.

TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select

Edit QuickText from the list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^M. ^{E S S A G I N G}

113

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text Creating and sending a multimedia

messages. The Messaging application

automatically replaces invalid characters.

message

KEY TERM Slide A collection of text, pictures,

videos, and sounds that are grouped together

within a multimedia message. During

playback, all the items within a particular slide

appear on the same screen. If a multimedia

message contains multiple slides, each slide

can be viewed separately during playback.

Multimedia messages consist of text,

photos, videos, and sounds presented as

one or more slides. You can include any of

the following items:

Select Send.

TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the

message without sending it. To access the

draft, select the category pick list at the top of

the screen and select Drafts.

Item

Supported File Types

JPG, GIF, WBMP

Pictures

Videos

MPEG4, 3GPP, 3GPP2

MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3

AMR, QCELP, MP3

Ringtones

Sound clips

Press Applications

and select

Messaging

Select New.

Select Add Media.

M E S S A G I N G

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Select the To field to address the

message with up to 25 addresses:

• Press Center

. If the recipient’s

name appears in the list of recent

addresses, select it from the list.

• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,

enter the first initial and last name (no

spaces), and then select the

recipient’s phone number or email

address.

TIP When creating a message, you can

• If the recipient’s name is not in the list

of recent addresses or your Contacts

list, enter the phone number or email

address.

preview or delete an item. Highlight the item,

press Center on the 5-way, and then select

Remove, View, or Play.

(Optional) Select Sound , and then

select one of the following:

Enter a subject.

Select the image placeholder, and then

select one of the following:

Record new: Record a sound clip of up

to 1 minute.

Attach picture/video: Insert one photo

or video from your Centro or an

expansion card.

Attach voice memo: Select a memo

you recorded in the Voice Memo

application.

Take new picture: Take a picture with

the built-in camera and add it to the

message.

Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.

Enter a text message or caption.

Take new video: Capture a short video

with the built-in camcorder and add it to

the message.

Select Add slide to insert additional

slides.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^M. ^{E S S A G I N G}

115

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the

The new message alert may include any of

the following buttons:

message as the recipient will see it.

11 (Optional) Press Menu

, and then

OK: Dismisses the alert and places the

message in your Inbox.

select High Priority from the Compose

menu to mark the message as urgent.

Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can

reply with a text message. To send an

MMS reply, select Add from Chat View.

12 Select Send.

DID YOU KNOW You can send a contact or

calendar entry. Select the entry, open the

Record menu, select Send, and then select

Messaging.

Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone

number.

Go To Msg: Opens the message so you

can view its full contents.

Receiving messages

Delete: Moves the message from your

Inbox to the Deleted folder.

When your phone is turned on and is in an

area of wireless coverage, you

automatically receive new text messages.

For multimedia messages, you can set

your Centro to automatically download

new messages or to notify you that a

message is ready to be downloaded (see

Customizing your Messaging settings). You

can also configure how your Centro notifies

you when a new message arrives (see

Selecting Messaging alert tones).

M E S S A G I N G

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Viewing/playing a multimedia message

TIP When you receive a message, you can

also press Send to call the sender.

Press Applications

Messaging

and select

TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert dialog

box displays all your pending alerts. Select an

item’s description to jump to that item, or

check the box to clear that item. To view all

your pending alerts from any screen on your

Centro, press and hold Center on the 5-way.

Select the message you want to view.

If there are sounds or multiple slides,

playback begins immediately.

Do any of the following:

• Use the onscreen controls to scroll to

other slides and messages.

Using links in messages

When you receive a text message that

contains a telephone number, email

address, or URL, you can dial the number,

send an email message, or go to the web

page immediately.

Press Applications

Messaging

and select

Select the message that contains the

link you want to use.

• To save a sound, press Menu

and select Save Sound from the

Message menu. You can access

saved sounds later by pressing

Select the phone number, email

address, or URL (appears as underlined

blue text).

Applications

Sounds

and selecting

or Voice Memo

Your Centro automatically launches the

appropriate application from the link.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^M. ^{E S S A G I N G}

117

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

• To save a picture, press Menu

and select Save Picture from the

Message menu. You can access

saved pictures later by pressing

Press Applications

Messaging

and select

Select the folder list in the title bar and

select the folder you want to sort.

Applications

Pics&Videos

and selecting

Press Menu

Select View, and then select Sort by

Name or Sort by Date.

• To copy the text, use the stylus to

highlight the text, press Menu

select Edit, and then select Copy.

• To stop playback of a message, select

Play/Stop.

• To view message details, press

and select Message

Details from the Message menu.

• To save a calendar or contact entry,

open the message details. You can

access saved entries later by pressing

Applications

Calendar

(depending on the type of entry you

saved).

and selecting

or Contacts

Deleting messages

You can delete several messages at once

from any folder by using the Purge

command.

Select OK.

TIP To delete an individual message, highlight

it in the message list, and then select Delete.

Arranging your messages

You can rearrange the messages in any

folder by using the Sort command.

M E S S A G I N G

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Press Applications

Messaging

and select

You can carry on multiple chats at the same

time and easily switch between them,

using the pick list at the top of the screen.

Select the folder list in the title bar and

select the folder that contains the

messages you want to delete.

TIP To find a chat you had with someone, open

your Messaging Inbox and select a chat

session.

Press Menu

Select Purge from the Message menu.

Select the Purge pick list, and then

select an option.

Press Applications

Messaging

Do one of the following:

and select

Select OK.

Start a new chat: Select a message

and reply to it.

Chatting with Messaging

DID YOU KNOW You can send and receive text

Continue an existing chat: Select a

message that displays the Chat

icon.

messages even while you are on a phone call.

This is easiest when using a hands-free device

or the speakerphone.

When you exchange more than one

message with a single contact, the

messages you exchange with that person

are grouped into a chat session. When you

select a chat session from your message

list, the upper part of Chat View displays all

messages you’ve exchanged with this

contact, and the lower part provides an

entry area.

Enter your message.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^M. ^{E S S A G I N G}

119

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

MMS Receipts: Indicates whether you

want to receive a confirmation when an

outgoing MMS message is delivered.

TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is

pending or enroute.

Validity Period: Indicates how long you

want an outgoing message to be valid.

Select Send.

Customizing your Messaging settings

Confirm message deletions: Indicates

whether you want deletion confirmation

prompts to appear.

Press Applications

and select

Messaging

Press Menu

Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicates

whether you want the body text to

appear in the alert when you receive a

new message, or whether you want the

alert to hide the text and prompt you to

go to the message.

From the Options menu, select

Preferences.

On the Messages tab, set any of the

following preferences for your individual

messages:

Select the Chat tab and set any of the

following preferences for chat sessions:

New message: Indicates whether text

or multimedia messaging is the default

format for a new message.

M E S S A G I N G

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Create chats from messages: Indicate

when you want to group messages

from the same person into a chat.

Show timestamps in chats: Indicate

whether you want to see the local date

and time the message was sent next to

each message.

Display my name in chat window as:

Enter the name you want to use as the

label for your messages in Chat View.

Automatically collect MMS

messages: Indicate whether you want

to download multimedia messages

automatically.

Label color: Select a color to

differentiate your messages from the

sender’s messages while in Chat View.

Network Configuration: Indicate if you

want to use Automatic or Manual

message retrieval. If you select Manual,

select Edit and enter the AT&T settings.

Use color for: Indicate whether you

want both your name and message text

in the selected label color, or only your

name.

NOTE We recommend that you do not

change the Network Configuration

settings.

Select the Network tab and set any of

the following preferences for network

connections.

Select OK.

Selecting Messaging alert tones

DID YOU KNOW

Your Centro includes a silent

alert that can vibrate even when the Ringer

switch is set to Sound Off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^M. ^{E S S A G I N G}

121

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Press Applications

and select

What are all those icons?

Messaging.

TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the

Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select

the folder list in the title bar and select a

different folder from the list.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Alerts.

The message descriptions in the Inbox,

Outbox, and Sent folders show the

message status:

•

Unread messages appear in bold.

Read messages appear in plain text.

Urgent messages appear with a red

exclamation point (!).

Select the Application pick list and

select Messaging.

The following icons show the message

type and additional status info:

Select the Volume pick list and select

the volume level.

A text message

A chat session

Select the Vibrate pick list and select

when you want your Centro to vibrate.

Select the Message Tone pick list and

select a tone for incoming message

alerts.

A multimedia message that is ready

for you to download

Check the boxes if you want to see

onscreen alerts when a new message

arrives and when a message you sent is

received.

A multimedia message that is fully

downloaded

A multimedia message that is fully

downloaded and contains sound

Select Done.

M E S S A G I N G

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Instant Messaging on your Centro is similar

to Instant Messaging on your computer.

Using the IM application, you can sign on

to up to three IM communities, send and

receive instant messages, and view

contact status information and manage

your presence. You can switch among IM

communities with a touch of the 5-way.

A message that is waiting to be

sent

A receipt, which you requested,

confirming delivery of the message

An outgoing message with an error

DID YOU KNOW If you are outside a coverage

Messages are billed to the owner of the

Centro no matter which IM account you

use.

area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing

messages go into the Outbox. When you

return to a coverage area or turn your phone

on, your pending messages are automatically

sent and transferred to the Sent folder.

Accessing IM

Press Applications

and select

Instant Messaging

(IM)

Select an IM community.

Instant Messaging (IM) is a form of

real-time communication between two

people based on the exchange of short,

simple text messages via computer or

mobile device. You can see which of your

contacts are available to participate in an

IM conversation or chat. You initiate a chat

by selecting an available contact and

sending a message.

I N S T A N T

( I M )

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Dow^Mnlo^Ea^Sd^S.^{A G I N G}

123

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Signing on

Once you sign on, you can add contacts to

establish a list of people you want to

correspond with via Instant Messaging.

You can also indicate whether or not you

are available for Instant Messaging.

If you are signing on to your existing IM

account on your Centro, sign on to the

community using your existing

username or email address (whichever

your IM provider requires) and

password.

Sending a Message

You can select Quick Text and Smileys to

make your messages quick and easy to

enter or you can simply enter text in the

usual way.

NOTE Some IM providers allow you to

sign on to multiple devices at the same

time, for example, both your Centro and

your computer. With other IM providers,

signing on to an existing IM account on

your Centro may automatically sign you out

of another currently running IM session.

Sign on to an IM community.

Select Send Message To and select a

recipient from your contacts list.

Enter the text of your message and

select Send.

Press Applications

Instant Messaging

and select

Select an IM community.

Receiving a Message

Enter your username and password in

the form requested by the IM

community.

You can receive messages as long as you

are signed on to an IM community. A beep

announces the arrival of an IM message.

(Optional) Select Save Password to

have your password stored in IM.

When you hear a beep, press

Applications

Messaging

and select Instant

(Optional) Select Auto Sign On to

automatically sign on to the IM

community whenever you select it.

Select Done or Sign On.

I N S T A N T

( I M )

^MD^Eo^Sw^Sn^Al^Goa^{I N}d^Gfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

124

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

Select an IM community you are signed

on to. If you don’t see your message,

•

When you select Exit, you can go to

other applications and return without

signing in again. Conversations remain

active.

use the five-way

to switch among

IM communities until your message is

visible.

When you select Sign Out, you are

asked to confirm that you want to

terminate the session and end all active

conversations. When you confirm, you

officially sign out, and your contacts see

you as unavailable. To resume instant

messaging, you must sign in again to

the IM provider.

Leaving IM

You can either exit an IM community or

sign out.

I N S T A N T

( I M )

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Dow^Mnlo^Ea^Sd^S.^{A G I N G}

125

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

I N S T A N T

( I M )

^MD^Eo^Sw^Sn^Al^Goa^{I N}d^Gfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126

CHAPTER

Your Push to Talk application

Push to Talk from AT&T is a convenient way to stay in touch

with friends, family, and colleagues. With this walkie-talkie type

of service, you can see who is available to talk and you can

instantly reach others without dialing phone numbers and

waiting for the phone to ring. Push to Talk calls can be made to

one person or to a group of people. Think of Push to Talk as

instant messaging that uses voice instead of text.

Benefits

•

Organize your friends and

colleagues into groups

•

Select the PTT contacts who are

out with you on a Saturday night;

coordinate a rendezvous point with

one PTT call

•

Communicate with a large,

dispersed group of people by voice

or text message

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Setting up PTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Creating a PTT contact list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Viewing availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

What can I do when I’m on a PTT call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Using the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Sending messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Viewing message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 46

Customizing your PTT settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

one time or up to 29 in a group); an icon

next to each name tells you whether

they're available. Then press and hold the

Side button to make the call.

What is Push to Talk?

Have you ever had to use the phone to

coordinate the actions of, or give

information to, a group of people? With

Push to Talk (PTT) you can instantly inform

all of them with a single call.

Since the speakerphone is automatically

on, hold your Centro like a walkie-talkie, a

few inches away from your mouth, and

listen for the tone that signals that you can

start to speak.

How PTT works

To make a PTT call, press the Side button

to go to Push to Talk. Select the people you

want to talk to (up to seven individuals at

W H A T I S

T O T A L K ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Down^Plo^Ua^Sd^H.

129

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

each decide to head off in a separate

direction for the day. When you’re ready

to set a meeting place, you can call the

whole family at once. No more putting

one person on hold and switching lines

or calling people multiple times to

arrange the gathering.

DID YOU KNOW The speakerphone is

automatically on when you are available,

unless your Ringer switch is set to Sound Off

Like a walkie-talkie, PTT allows only one

person to speak at a time. No one else can

speak until you give up control by releasing

the Side button. A tone signals that you

gave up control. Now somebody else on

the call can have a turn speaking.

DID YOU KNOW

With a single fee per month,

PTT may be more economical than sending

text messages to a group of people or making

conference calls.

What can I do with PTT?

Here are a couple of examples of what you

can do with PTT:

To use PTT you must first subscribe to the

AT&T Push to Talk service and then set up

the Push to Talk application on your

Palm^®Centro^™smart device. Next, create a

PTT list by inviting people to be your PTT

contacts.

•

Your work colleagues are scattered in

several buildings on campus and around

the country. You created a Project Team

group in PTT. An important last-minute

change happens in the project; for

things to go smoothly, you need to

communicate the news right away.

Using Push to Talk, you can instantly

speak to the entire team; everyone

hears the same thing, and everyone

knows what everyone else needs to do.

Your PTT contact list is separate from your

contact list in the Contacts application, and

the people you invite must also subscribe

to the AT&T Push to Talk service. So to get

the full benefit of Push to Talk, you may

want to encourage a bunch of your friends,

family members, or business colleagues to

•

You’re on vacation with your family and

you create a Family Vacation group. You

W H A T I S P U S H T O T A L K ?

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

also subscribe to the AT&T Push to Talk

service.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Select the availability pick list in the

upper-right corner, and then select the

icon that describes your availability.

Setting up PTT

Here are the icons:

Available: Your Ringer switch is set

to Sound On , and you

automatically hear incoming PTT

calls.

Setting up the Push to Talk application

Press Applications

Select Push to Talk

Select Yes to set up Push to Talk.

Silent: Your Ringer switch is set to

Sound Off

. When a PTT call

Enter the name you want people to see,

comes in, you get an alert. You can

choose whether to answer or ignore

the PTT call.

and then select OK.

Do Not Disturb: You can make PTT

calls, but you cannot receive them.

Log Out: You cannot make or

receive PTT calls.

Wait for the Welcome to Push to Talk

screen to appear. If an error appears

instead, contact AT&T for assistance.

NOTE The Available option appears in the

availability pick list only when the Ringer

Setting your availability

switch is set to Sound On

. Similarly,

the Silent option appears in the availability

pick list only when the Ringer switch is set

When you first set up Push to Talk, your

availability is automatically set to Available.

You can change your availability setting at

any time.

to Sound Off

S E T T I N G U P P T T

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Creating a PTT

contact list

Although your PTT contact list is separate

from your contact list in the Contacts

application, you can still include contacts

from the Contacts application as well as

names and numbers you enter on the spot.

You can also create groups to

When you change your availability status,

the availability icon in the upper-right corner

of the PTT screen shows your new

availability status in about ten seconds.

Similarly, after about ten seconds, the

AT&T network updates your availability

status on the PTT screen of all your

contacts and groups.

communicate with several people at the

same time.

TIP To add a contact to your PTT contact list or

to a PTT group, the contact must subscribe to

the AT&T Push to Talk service.

Adding a contact

TIP Anytime you want to check your availability

setting, just glance at the availability icon in

the upper-right corner of the PTT screen. You

can also see your availability icon in the

upper-right corner of the Phone application

title bar.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Select New, and then select New

Contact from the pop-up menu.

C R E A T I N G

P T T

L I S T

Downlo^Ca^Od ^Nfr^Tom^{A C}W^Tww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

132

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

contact’s current availability status once

they accept the invitation.

DID YOU KNOW

You can have up to 99 contacts

in your PTT contacts list.

Changing a contact’s name

Select Lookup.

When you change a contact’s name, the

change affects only the way that contact’s

name appears on your device.

Select the contact you want to add, and

then select Add.

(Optional) Select the name and change

it to the name that you want to see in

your PTT list—for example, a nickname.

You can use up to 20 characters for the

name.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact’s name.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Select OK to send the contact an

invitation to join your PTT list.

Select View Contact.

TIP If a contact is not listed in your Contacts

application, you can add a contact by entering

the person’s name and mobile phone number.

Be sure to include the area code, but you

don’t need to enter hyphens or punctuation;

PTT enters those for you.

The contact’s name appears in your PTT

list, and the icon indicates that the

contact has not responded to the

Enter a new name for the contact.

Select OK.

invitation. This icon changes to reflect the

C R E A T I N G

P T T C O N T A C T L I S T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And ^ADownload.

133

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Deleting a contact

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact you want to

delete.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Select Delete.

Select Yes.

Enter a name for the group (up to 20

characters).

The contact receives a message indicating

that you deleted him or her from your PTT

list.

Check the box next to each contact you

want to add to the group, and uncheck

any contacts you do not want to include

in this group.

Creating a group

Groups are an easy way to make calls or to

send voice or text messages to multiple

PTT contacts at the same time. You can

create up to 30 groups. Each group can

include up to 29 contacts.

Select OK.

TIP Need to add a group member who is not

already a contact in your PTT list? After the

group is created, you can edit the group and

add new members and contacts.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Select New, and then select New

Group from the pop-up menu.

TIP You can also create a group by first

checking the boxes next to names in the main

PTT list and then selecting New.

The New Group dialog box shows you

all the contacts in your PTT list.

C R E A T I N G

P T T

L I S T

Downlo^Ca^Od ^Nfr^Tom^{A C}W^Tww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Responding to invitations

Defer: Places the invitation in your Pending

list so that you can respond later by

When you’re invited to join someone else’s

PTT list, you receive an invitation. You also

receive an invitation when a group owner

asks you to join a group.

selecting the Pending invitation

in the title bar or by responding to an

invitation reminder.

icon

TIP If you don’t respond within seven days, the

invitation expires and you must receive and

accept another invitation to join the PTT list or

group.

DID YOU KNOW

You can set your PTT settings

to automatically accept all invitations. See

Customizing your PTT settings for details.

Editing a group

Select one of the following to respond to

an invitation:

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the group you want to edit.

Accept: Sends an acceptance message to

the contact or group owner. The

requester’s name appears in your PTT list

and your name appears in the requester’s

PTT list or group.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Select Edit Group.

Decline: Sends a message to the contact

or group owner indicating that you don’t

want to join the PTT list or group.

C R E A T I N G

P T T C O N T A C T L I S T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And ^ADownload.

135

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

If you are the owner of the group, you

can do any of the following:

If you are not the owner of the group,

you can do any of the following:

• View the availability of each member.

• View the availability of each group

member.

• View a group member’s mobile phone

number by highlighting the member’s

name and waiting a few seconds for

the number to appear.

• Change the group name.

• Add a member by selecting New

Member and entering a name and

number or by checking the box next to

a contact’s name. The new person

receives your invitation, and all the

existing group members receive an

alert when the person accepts or

refuses the invitation.

• Change the group name. The other

members don’t see the new name.

• Invite a group member to join your

PTT list by highlighting the member’s

name, pressing Menu

, and then

selecting Invite Selected Member.

• Delete a member by unchecking the

box next to the member’s name. The

person receives a deletion notification

and all the remaining group members

receive an alert notifying them that

the contact is no longer in the group.

• Invite all group members to join your

PTT list by pressing Menu and

selecting Invite ALL Members.

• Leave the group by selecting Leave.

Press OK.

C R E A T I N G

P T T

L I S T

Downlo^Ca^Od ^Nfr^Tom^{A C}W^Tww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Leaving a group

The group members receive a message

indicating that you deleted the group.

If you are not the owner of a group, you

can leave a group at any time. If you’re the

group’s owner, you must delete the group

to leave it.

Viewing availability

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

It’s easy to know when your contacts are

available to talk. Simply glance at the

Availability icon next to each contact or

group name in your PTT list.

Highlight the group you want to leave.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Select Leave.

Select Yes.

The group is removed from your PTT list

and the remaining group members receive

a message indicating that you left the

group.

Deleting a group

If you are the owner of a group, you can

dissolve a group by deleting it.

The Availability icons indicate the following:

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

The contact has not responded to

your PTT invitation.

Highlight the group you want to delete.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

The contact is available to receive PTT

calls.

menu.

Select Delete Group.

Select Yes.

V I E W I N G A V A I L A B I L I T Y

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

The contact’s Ringer switch is set to

Sound Off so that he or she can

screen PTT calls.

All group members have logged out,

are outside the coverage area, or have

turned off their phones. They cannot

make or receive PTT calls. This status

also appears when all group members

have low batteries.

The contact’s status is Do Not Disturb

(DND), which means the contact is

logged in to PTT but is refusing all PTT

calls.

The contact has logged out and

cannot make or receive PTT calls

because the contact turned off their

phone. This status also appears when

the contact’s battery is low.

TIP The numbers that appear next to the

group name, such as (4/5), indicate how many

group members are available to make and

receive PTT calls.

TIP A plus sign next to a name indicates a

group. Select it to see the members of the

group

One or more group members are

available to receive PTT calls.

One or more group members have

their Ringer switch set to Sound Off

so that they can screen PTT calls.

NOTE When someone changes their

availability setting, it takes about ten

seconds for the availability icon in the

picklist to change to the new availability

icon.

None of the invitees has responded to

the invitation to join the group.

All group members do not want to

receive PTT calls.

Receiving availability alerts

You can choose whether you receive an

alert when a contact becomes available.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact for whom you

want to set the alert status.

V I E W I N G

^AD^{V A}ow^{I L}n^Alo^Ba^Id^{L I}f^Tro^Ym Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Press Right

menu.

to open the pop-up

TIP You can simultaneously change the alert

status for multiple contacts. Check the box

next to the contacts for whom you want to

change the alert status, and highlight one of

the selected contacts. Press Right to open

the pop-up menu and select Set All Contact

Alerts to change the alert status for the

selected contacts.

Select Set Contact Alert to ON to

receive availability alerts. To turn off

availability alerts, select Set Contact

Alert to OFF.

TIP You can also view and revise the alert

status for all your contacts by pressing Menu,

selecting Options, and then selecting

Contact Alerts. To change the alert status,

check or uncheck the box next to a contact’s

name, and then select OK to accept your

changes.

When you receive an availability alert, you

can do any of the following:

Making calls

•

Press the Side button to make a PTT

call to the contact.

You can use Push to Talk to make PTT calls

to one or more of your PTT contacts, to a

group, or to selected group members. You

can also use Push to Talk to make a phone

(cellular) call to one of your PTT contacts.

Press Send to make a phone call to

the contact.

Select Ignore with Text to address a

text message to the contact.

NOTE You cannot call both a contact and a

group at the same time.

Select Dismiss to acknowledge the

alert without taking action.

M A K I N G C A L L S

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Making a PTT call

When you release the Side button, a

tone signals the person(s) on the other

end that you’ve finished talking and the

next person can begin to speak.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Check the box next to up to seven

contacts or highlight the group you

want to call.

NOTE When you make a PTT call, the

speakerphone is on by default when the

Ringer switch is set to Sound On. If your

Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the PTT

call goes to the earpiece.

TIP You can jump to a particular contact or

group by entering the first few letters of the

contact or group name.

When a tone signals you that the other

person has finished speaking, you can

press and hold the Side button again to

continue the conversation.

Press Power/End

to hang up.

DID YOU KNOW

If a PTT call remains inactive

for more than 30 seconds, the call ends

automatically.

Hold your Centro a few inches from

your mouth, as you would hold a

walkie-talkie.

KEY TERM Quick Group A selection of

multiple contacts that you make to form an ad

hoc group for a single call. The contacts in a

Quick Group must have a status of Available or

Silent. If a contact’s status is DND or Logged

Out, you cannot include that contact in a

Quick Group.

Press and hold the Side button.

Wait for the tone that signals when you

can begin to speak.

When you’ve finished speaking, release

the Side button.

M A K I N G C A L L S

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Making a PTT call to a dynamic group

Making a phone call

From time to time you may want to talk to

selected members of a group instead of to

the whole group. You can do this by making

a dynamic group call.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact you want to call.

Press Send , and then select Dial to

make the call.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the group that contains the

contacts you want to call.

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Press Power/End

to hang up.

Select Dynamic Call.

Select group members by checking the

box next to their names.

Receiving calls

When your phone is on and your availability

is set to Available, you automatically hear

incoming PTT callers speaking.

When your phone is on and your availability

is set to Silent or if you receive a PTT call

while you’re on another call, you receive an

onscreen alert.

Press and hold the Side button to make

the call.

Press Power/End

to hang up.

R E C E I V I N G C A L L S

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

•

Select Dismiss or press the Volume

button to acknowledge the alert without

taking action.

Quickly press the Side button to

dismiss the Call-Me alert.

You can do either of the following:

•

Press Send or select Answer to

accept the call.

•

Press Power/End or select Ignore to

reject the call.

Once you accept the call, you need to

press the Side button to speak.

What can I do when

I’m on a PTT call?

Responding to a Call-Me alert

When you receive a Call-Me alert, you can

do any of the following:

When you make or receive a PTT call, the

Phone application’s Active Call View

appears.

•

Press and hold the Side button to make

a PTT call to the contact.

Press Send to make a phone call to

the contact.

Select Ignore with Text to address a

text message to the contact.

W H A T

D O W H E N I ’ M O N

P T T C A L L ?

^{C A N}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Lets the initiator of the call convert

the PTT call to a phone call.

Contact’s

name

Lets you switch between calls

Call type

when more than one call is active.

Call status

NOTE The call status reads Calling when a

PTT call is in the process of connecting.

You can begin speaking once you hear the

tone. You don’t have to wait until the call

status changes to Active.

Button label

Use the 5-way

or stylus to select any

of the following onscreen buttons:

Turns off the speakerphone, which

Converting a PTT call into a phone call

is on by default. Use the earpiece

or the headset to continue the

conversation. You can also use

your Bluetooth headset or car kit.

When a PTT call is in progress, the person

who made the call can convert the call into

a phone call.

Turns the speakerphone on when it

is off. If your Ringer switch is set to

Make a PTT call (see Making a PTT call).

Tell the other participants that you’re

going to convert the PTT call into a

phone call and that they need to press

the Side button when they hear a tone.

Sound On

, the speakerphone is

on by default.

Places the current call on hold.

Keep in mind that if a PTT call

remains inactive for more than 30

seconds, it ends automatically.

Select Convert to cellular call

The other participants need to press the

Side button to continue the

conversation.

C A N

I ’ M O N

C A L L ?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com.^WAl^Hl M^{A T}anuals ^IS^Dea^Orc^Wh^HA^En^Nd Download. ^{P T T}

143

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

The call now acts similar to a cellular phone

call, and participants no longer need to

press the Side button to talk.

TIP If you have more than one active call, you

can switch between the calls, but you cannot

conference two PTT calls or a PTT call and a

phone call. You can still conference two phone

calls.

Making a second PTT call

While a phone call or PTT call is in

progress, you can make a second PTT call.

TIP To return to the original call without placing

a second call, press Phone.

While a call is in progress, select

Hold

Using the Call Log

Press the Side button to start PTT.

Check the box(es) next to the contact(s)

or group you want to call.

You can use the Call Log in the Phone

application to view and make PTT calls.

A PTT call can be originated from the Call

Log. All PTT calls appear with a PTT icon.

Press and hold the Side button to make

the call.

To switch between the two calls, select

Swap

Press Phone

tab in the Phone application.

Select the Call Log tab.

Highlight the number you want to call.

to display the Main

NOTE Keep in mind that if a PTT call

remains inactive for more than 30 seconds,

it ends automatically.

NOTE You cannot redial a dynamic group

call that you initiated. When you select a

dynamic group call that you received, it

redials the entire group. You cannot redial a

Quick Group call regardless of whether you

initiated or received the call.

U S I N G

C A L L

^{T H E}Downlo^La^Od ^Gfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

Press and hold the Side button to make Sending a voice message

a PTT call to the selected number.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact(s) or group you

want to send the voice message to.

PTT icon

showswho’s

available

Press Right

menu.

to open the pop-up

Select Voice Message.

Press and hold the Side button while

you record your voice message.

TIP When the Record/Pause button is

highlighted, you can also press Center on the

5-way to start and stop recording.

DID YOU KNOW

You can access the Call Log by

pressing and holding the Side button when

you are not in the Push to Talk application.

Sending messages

You can send voice messages, text

messages, and Call-Me alerts to contacts

in your PTT list. Voice messages are a way

to send a message directly to the

recipient’s voicemail.

DID YOU KNOW

You cannot start a voice

message during a PTT call.

S E N D I N G M E S S A G E S

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

When you release the Side button,

Sending a Call-Me alert

select one of the following:

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact you want to send

the Call-Me alert to.

Plays the voice message

Erases the voice message and

refreshes the screen so you can

rerecord the message

Press Right

to open the pop-up

menu.

Select Call-Me Alert.

Sends the voice message

DID YOU KNOW

A tone sounds every ten

Sending a text message

seconds until the recipient answers the alert

or six minutes elapse, whichever occurs first.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Highlight the contact or group you want

to send the text message to.

Viewing messages

Press Right

menu.

to open the pop-up

You can view all your PTT alerts and

deferred invitations in one place.

Select Text Message.

Enter the text.

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Press Menu

Select Send.

NOTE When you address a text message

to a group that contains more than ten

members, the text message is sent only to

the first ten members in the group.

Select Options and then select

Message Center.

Do any of the following:

• To acknowledge and delete an

individual item, check the box next to

the item and select Clear.

V I E W I N G

^MD^Eo^Sw^Sn^Alo^Ga^Ed^Sfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

• To acknowledge and delete all the

invitations, make calls, and send

items, select Clear All.

messages.

• To keep all of the items without

changing them, select Done.

NOTE Contacts who received an invitation

with your original name will continue to see

your original name when you communicate

with them. If you want a contact to see

your updated name, you must send the

contact a new invitation.

Select Done.

Customizing your

PTT settings

Sort contacts by availability: Places

contacts that are available to talk at the

top of your PTT list. If you do not check

this box, contacts are sorted

Press the Side button to go to PTT.

Press Menu

alphabetically.

Select Options and then select PTT

Settings.

Auto Accept Invitations: Accepts all

invitations automatically from individual

PTT subscribers or from groups, when

the corresponding box is checked.

Select OK.

Change any of the following settings:

Set Your Name: Enables you to modify

the name people see when you send

C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R P T T S E T T I N G S

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N

C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R P T T S E T T I N G S

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Your connections to the web

and wireless devices

You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,

news, web-based email. Now, with the AT&T network and the

built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost

anywhere.

The built-in Bluetooth^®feature of your Palm^®Centro^™smart

device helps you easily set up wireless connections to a

number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of

cable-free connectivity. You can also use your Centro to

connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or

your favorite photos with other people.

Benefits

•

Carry the web with you

•

Connect your computer to the

Internet through your Centro

•

Store web pages for offline

viewing

Shop online for ringtones,

graphics, and multimedia files

•

Connect to Bluetooth headsets

and car kits

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your Centro™ . 160

Connecting with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Viewing a web page

Web browser

To make viewing web pages on your

Centro a better experience, the web

The web browser on your Centro provides

quick and easy access to web pages. You

can view most of the sites you use on your

computer, including those with security

and advanced features, such as JavaScript

and frames. To browse the web, you must

activate data services from AT&T.

browser reformats web pages into a single

column and resizes images. In this

format—called Optimized Mode—you can

see most of the content without scrolling

left or right. You can also switch to Wide

Page Mode if you like.

DID YOU KNOW

You can send email from a

DID YOU KNOW The security certificates and

web page on your Centro. Email addresses

appear as links on web pages. After you

configure an email application on your Centro,

you can select an email address link to create

a message to the selected address.

128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption

let you visit secure websites, like ones for

banking and using email. Some secure sites

also require specific browsers, so those may

not work with your web browser.

DID YOU KNOW The web browser supports

Optimized Mode

JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and

cookies, but it does not support plug-ins (such

as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downl^Woa^Ed^B. ^{B R O W S E R}

151

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Do any of the following to navigate

within the web page:

Wide Page Mode

View a page in wide layout format (as

on your computer): Press Menu

select Options, and then select Wide

Page Mode.

Scroll through the page: In Optimized

Mode (the default format) press Up

or Down . In Wide Page Mode, use all

buttons on the 5-way

any direction.

to scroll in

Press Applications

and select

Web

to open the Blazer web

Follow a link to another web page: In

Optimized Mode, highlight the link by

pressing Left or Right and then

browser. If necessary, select Yes to turn

on your phone, and Yes to connect to

the Internet.

press Center

to go to the selected

If you do not see either of these icons

in the title bar, data services are

not available in your current location and

you cannot connect to the Internet.

page. In Wide Page Mode, use the

stylus to select a link.

Submit a form: Enter the info and then

select the onscreen button to submit

the form. If the form doesn’t have an

Enter a web page address (URL) in the

Address Bar and select Go.

onscreen button, press Return

NOTE If you browse to a secure web

page, a lock

Address Bar.

icon appears in the

TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options

menu and select Font. To fit more text on the

screen, select Small. To make the text easier

to read, select Large.

W E B

^{B R O W}D^So^Ew^Rnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

152

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Use the 5-way

the following icons in the title bar:

to access any of

quickly. Note that a bookmark is different

from a saved page and different from a

favorite (see Defining favorite buttons).

Goes to your home page.

DID YOU KNOW

The predefined bookmarks

Opens a dialog box where you

can enter a web address or view

a list of recently viewed web

pages.

take you to pages that are optimized for your

Centro.

Go to the page you want to bookmark.

Goes back in order through

pages you viewed.

Press Menu

Goes forward in order through

pages you viewed.

Select Add Bookmark from the Page

menu.

Gets the latest version of the

current web page. This is

sometimes called refreshing the

web page.

Change the entries in the Name and

Description fields.

Select OK, and then select OK again.

Opens a list where you can

select Fast mode (no images or

style sheets) or Normal mode

(with images and style sheets).

Creating a bookmark

With bookmarks, you can instantly access

a web page without entering the address

every time. The web browser can store up

to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing

you to open your favorite web pages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downl^Woa^Ed^B. ^{B R O W S E R}

153

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Saving a page

You can use the web browser to save a

page for offline viewing, so you don’t need

a wireless connection to view it later.

Go to the page you want to save.

Press Menu

Select Save Page from the Page menu.

Select OK, and then select OK again.

Select the bookmark or saved page you

want to view.

Viewing bookmarks or saved pages

Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in

Bookmarks View. Saved pages are

indicated by a small triangle in the

upper-right corner of the bookmark.

TIP To go back to the last web page you

viewed without selecting a bookmark, select

Page View.

Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved

page

DID YOU KNOW You can make Bookmarks

View the default view when you open the

browser. Open the Options menu and select

Preferences. Select the Start With pick list

and select Bookmarks.

In Bookmarks View, press Menu

Select Edit Bookmarks from the

Bookmarks menu.

Select the bookmark you want to edit or

delete.

Select the Bookmarks View

the web page toolbar.

icon in

TIP If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a

bookmark, it is probably locked and these

actions are prohibited.

W E B

^{B R O W}D^So^Ew^Rnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

154

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Enter the desired changes or select

Delete.

page or move it to a different bookmark

page by dragging and dropping it on one

of the Bookmark Page

icons at the

Select OK.

bottom of the screen.

Arranging bookmarks and saved pages

Select OK.

Bookmarks View has ten pages where you

can store and arrange bookmarks and

saved pages in a way that works for you.

For example, you can store travel links on

Shopping at ATT Mall

AT&T Mall is a web-based storefront where

you can. select links to websites that list

one bookmark page, stock links on another, and sell ringtones, graphics, and

and business links on a third page.

multimedia files. When you select a link,

the web browser opens and displays a

website where you can buy items and

download them to your Centro.

In Bookmarks View, press Menu

Press Applications

ATT Mall

and select

Select the link to the type of items you

want to explore or buy.

Follow the website’s directions for

buying and downloading items.

Select Edit Bookmarks from the

Exploring AT&T Music

Bookmarks menu.

AT&T Music gives you access to a variety

of music resources.

Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.

Use the stylus to drag and drop a

bookmark into the desired slot. You can

move a bookmark within the current

Press Applications

AT&T Music

and select

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downl^Woa^Ed^B. ^{B R O W S E R}

155

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Select the link to the type of item you

want to explore or buy.

file to an expansion card, transfer it to your

computer using an expansion card reader

(sold separately), and view it on your

computer.

• Select Shop Music to shop for music

and ringtones.

• Select Music Player (Pocket Tunes

Deluxe™) so you can store, search,

and listen to music.

You can download files such as new

applications and choose to play or save

music and video files in many popular

formats—provided that the website

permits the downloading of files:

• Select Music ID to identify an artist

and song title.

• Select XM Radio to access a variety

of satellite radio channels.

Item

Supported File Types

JPG, WBMP, GIF, PNG

MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV

MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3

MP3, WMA

Pictures

Videos

Ringtones

Music

• Select Community to connect to the

fan sites of popular artists and hit

bands.

Downloading files from a web page

The web browser lets you download files

that are recognized by one of the

applications on your Centro. When you

download a file, you can open it in the

application that recognizes the file. For

example, if you download an MP3 file, you

can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™

application.

TIP You can also access software and other

downloads using the Downloads bookmark.

Go to the page with the link to the file

you want to download.

Do one of the following:

• In Optimized Mode, press Left or

Right to highlight the link to the

If a file is not recognized by any application

on your Centro, you cannot open it on your

Centro. You can, however, download the

file, and then press Center

W E B

^{B R O W}D^So^Ew^Rnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

156

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

• In Wide Page Mode, tap the link with

your stylus.

Once streaming begins, playback starts

automatically. Use the following

controls when viewing or listening:

If prompted, select what you want to do

with the file: Play, Save To Device, or

Save To Card.

• Select

to return to the web page

containing the streamed content.

Select Yes.

• Select

pause playback.

or press Center

TIP You can also save an image from a web

page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.

• Select

or press Center

resume playback after pausing.

• A few seconds after playback begins,

the toolbar is hidden and you can view

the content on the full screen. Press

Streaming files from a web page

The web browser lets you stream files that

are recognized by one of the applications

on your Centro. For example, you can

choose to play music and video files in

many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).

or Down

to display the

toolbar; press Up

or Down

again to hide the toolbar again.

• Press the Volume button on the side

of your Centro to adjust the volume.

When the web browser recognizes

streamed content on a web page, it

Copying text from a web page

displays a Play

listen to the streamed content, select

Play

icon. To view or

You can copy text from a web page and

paste it into other applications.

Use the stylus to highlight the text you

want to copy.

TIP When the web browser recognizes

streamed content that is not supported by any

of the applications on your Centro, it displays a

“Media type not supported” message.

Press Menu

Select Edit, and then select Copy.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downl^Woa^Ed^B. ^{B R O W S E R}

157

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Go to the app in which you want to

paste the text, and position the cursor

where you want to paste the text.

Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box

to indicate whether you want the search

to wrap from the end of the page to the

beginning when the end is reached.

Press Menu

Select Find to start the search.

Select Edit, and then select Paste.

Customizing your web browser settings

DID YOU KNOW If the web browser does not

recognize a phone number as dialable, you

can copy the phone number (as text) and

paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a

web page or message).

In Page View, press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Select Page and set any of the following

preferences:

Returning to recently viewed pages

The History list stores the addresses of the

last 100 pages you visited. Items in the

History list are sorted chronologically.

In Page View, press Menu

Select History from the Page menu.

Select the web page you want to load.

Finding text on a web page

Start With: Determines which view

appears when you open the browser.

In Page View, press Menu

Select Find Text on Page from the

Home Page: Sets the page that appears

Page menu.

when you select

Enter the text you want to find.

Restore Default: Selects the original

home page, if you changed it.

W E B

^{B R O W}D^So^Ew^Rnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

158

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Show Address Bar: Sets whether the

Disable JavaScript: Bypasses

JavaScript elements on the web pages

you view.

web address appears in Page View.

When it is visible, you can select the

pick list to go to a previously viewed

page or enter a URL directly from Page

View.

Tap and Drag: Determines whether

dragging the stylus selects text or

scrolls through the contents of the

page.

Select General and set any of the

following preferences:

Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines

whether a web page appears as

designed (Normal mode) or with some

of the items removed for faster display.

Selecting Fast mode gives you the

following options:

• Disable cascading style sheets:

Determines whether style sheets are

applied when you load a web page.

When style sheets are disabled,

pages download faster, but you may

lose some of the formatting.

Auto-complete: Determines whether

the web browser suggests text, based

on your previous entries, when you

begin entering info.

KEY TERM Cascading Style Sheet (CSS)

A file that governs design elements of a web

page, such as its fonts, colors, and layout.

Disable cookies: Determines whether

websites can store personalized info on

your Centro. Some sites do not work

properly if you select this option.

• Don’t download images!

Determines whether images appear

when you load a web page. If you

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Downl^Woa^Ed^B. ^{B R O W S E R}

159

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

select not to view images, you can

still see any image by selecting the

placeholder box on the web page.

Cache: Indicates how much memory is

being used by your cache to store

recent pages and history. To free up this

memory, select Clear Cache.

TIP Lots of pretty graphics slowing you down?

Browse the web faster by enabling the Don’t

download images! option.

Clear cache on exit: Determines

whether the cache clears each time you

exit the web browser.

Select Advanced and set any of the

following preferences:

Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to

access the Internet. If your connection

requires a proxy server, please contact

your Internet service provider or IT

administrator for this information.

Select OK.

Connecting your

computer to the

Internet through

your Centro^™

Set memory limit for storing pages:

Sets the amount of memory used for

your cache. Pages are cached so that

they load faster the next time you view

them.

Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature

that converts your Centro into a modem so

that you can access the Internet from your

computer. If your computer is enabled with

Cookies: Indicates how much memory

is being used by cookies. To free up this

memory, select Clear Cookies.

C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R

T O T H E I N T E R N E T

Y O U R C E N T R O ™

Download ^Cfr^Oom^{M P}W^Uw^Tw^E.^RSomanuals.com. All M^Ta^Hnu^Ra^Ols^US^Ge^Harch And Download.

160

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set

up your Centro as a wireless modem using

the built-in Bluetooth technology.

Select Trusted Devices.

The following procedures describe the

process of setting up your Centro as a

wireless modem using the built-in

Bluetooth technology.

TIP If your computer is not enabled with

Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to

purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter

accessory for your computer to use this

feature.

Select Add Device. The discovery icon

appears, indicating that the discovery

process is active.

Select your computer from the Trusted

Devices list, and then select OK.

Creating a partnership between your

Centro and your computer

Make up a passkey, enter it on the

Bluetooth Security screen, and then

select OK. The passkey can be up to

16 numbers.

Make sure that your computer’s

Bluetooth setting is on and that your

computer is ready to create a Bluetooth

partnership. Check the documentation

that came with your computer to find

and change these settings.

NOTE You need this passkey in the next

step, so be sure to write it down exactly.

We recommend that you use a passkey of

16 numbers, where possible, to improve

the security of your Centro. The longer the

passkey, the more difficult it is for the

passkey to be deciphered.

On your Centro, press

Applications

Bluetooth

and select

Select Bluetooth On if it is not already

selected, and then select Setup

Devices.

C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O

I N T E R N E T

Y O U R C E N T R O ™

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. A^Tll^HM^Eanuals Searc^Th^HA^Rn^Od^UD^Go^Hwnload.

161

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Enter the same passkey on your

computer when prompted.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify that DUN is

enabled on your computer. See the

documentation that came with your

computer for details.

Select Done, and then select Done

again to return to the Bluetooth screen.

Open the Bluetooth application on your

computer and let it locate the Centro

you paired it with in the previous

procedure.

Setting up your computer for a

Bluetooth^®DUN connection

Follow the instructions from the

manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to

enable DUN.

Double-click the icon or option

representing your Centro. Your

computer connects to your Centro and

shows that DUN services are available.

Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth

DUN connection

Double-click the DUN icon.

Enter the following settings:

• Dial: *99***1#

The steps for accessing the Internet on

your computer may vary depending on your

operating system and how Bluetooth

wireless technology is set up on your

computer—for example, if it is built-in

versus if you are using a Bluetooth adapter.

If you need additional info, check your

computer’s documentation for how to set

up Bluetooth technology to access the

Internet using a DUN connection.

• User Name:

[email protected]

• Password: CINGULAR1

Click Dial. Once the connection is

successfully established, you can

browse the Internet on your computer

or download your email.

TIP You may need to use a virtual private

network (VPN) to access corporate email.

Check with your system administrator for

more information.

C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R

T O T H E I N T E R N E T

Y O U R C E N T R O ™

Download ^Cfr^Oom^{M P}W^Uw^Tw^E.^RSomanuals.com. All M^Ta^Hnu^Ra^Ols^US^Ge^Harch And Download.

162

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet

session

TIP If you get a message asking whether you

want your computer to remember the dial text

for this connection, we recommend that you

select Yes . This avoids errors and the

inconvenience of entering the dial text for

every session.

It is important to end a Bluetooth DUN

session after you finish using it. Ending the

DUN session lets you use the wireless

features of your Centro that require a data

connection, it frees up the Bluetooth

feature so that you can connect to other

Bluetooth devices, and it optimizes battery

life, too.

Look for a network connection icon in

the taskbar at the bottom of your

computer screen to verify that you are

connected.

On your computer, right-click the icon or

option representing your Centro.

DID YOU KNOW

You can check the status of the

Click Disconnect.

connection by right-clicking the Bluetooth

network icon in the taskbar.

Connecting with

Bluetooth devices

NOTE When a DUN connection is active,

you cannot use data services on your

Centro. For example, you cannot browse

the Web, or send or receive email

messages. Also, any scheduled automatic

email retrievals do not take place.

With the built-in Bluetooth wireless

technology on your Centro, you can

Receiving or sending phone calls suspends

the DUN session. The session resumes

when the call is ended.

connect to a number of Bluetooth devices,

including a hands-free device such as a

headset or car kit, a printer, or a GPS

receiver, as well as to other Centro smart

devices and handhelds that are equipped

with Bluetooth wireless technology. If your

W I T H

D E V I C E S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^CM^Oa^Nn^Nu^Ea^Cls^TS^{I N}ea^Grch And^BD^Lo^Uw^En^Tl^Ooa^Od^T.^H

163

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

computer is enabled with Bluetooth

wireless technology, you can also

Select Bluetooth On.

synchronize wirelessly or use your phone

to connect your computer to the Internet.

You can create a list of Bluetooth devices

that you trust to communicate with your

Centro. When communicating with trusted

devices, your Centro skips the discovery

process and creates a secure link as long

as the device is within range. Bluetooth

range is up to 30 feet depending on

(Optional) Enter a device name that

identifies your Centro when it is

environmental conditions, including

obstacles, radio interference from nearby

electronic equipment, and other factors.

discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

NOTE Use the same device name for all

your Bluetooth connections. If you change

the device name, you need to re-create any

partnerships you’ve already created.

When you configure a hands-free device,

as described previously in Connecting to a

Bluetooth^®hands-free device, the

hands-free device automatically appears in

your Trusted Devices list. Follow the steps

in this section to add other devices to your

Trusted Devices list, such as a friend’s

handheld.

Select Setup Devices.

Select Trusted Devices.

Requesting a connection with another

Bluetooth device

Press Applications

Bluetooth

and select

C O N N E C T I N G W I T H

Download^Bfr^Lo^Um^EW^{T O}w^Ow^T.S^Ho^Dm^Ea^Vn^Iu^Ca^Els^S.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

164

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices

have a predefined passkey. If your device

has a predefined passkey, you can find it in

the documentation for that device. Other

devices provide a screen where you enter

a passkey that you make up. In either case,

you must use the same passkey on both

your Centro and the other Bluetooth

device. We recommend that, where

possible, you make up a passkey of 16

Select Add Device. The Discovery icon

appears, indicating that the discovery

process is active.

alphanumeric characters (letters and

numerals only) to improve the security of

your Centro. The longer the passkey, the

more difficult it is for the passkey to be

deciphered.

Select the Show pick list and select

Nearby devices.

If the device you want to add doesn’t

appear on the Discovery Results list,

make sure that the other device is ready

to receive a connection request (see the

device’s documentation), and then

select Find More on your Centro to

search again.

10 Select Done.

Accepting a connection from another

Bluetooth device

TIP For the Centro to be visible to Bluetooth

devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to

On and visibility must be set to Visible or

Temporary.

Enter the same passkey on your Centro

and on the Bluetooth device, and select

OK.

W I T H

D E V I C E S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^CM^Oa^Nn^Nu^Ea^Cls^TS^{I N}ea^Grch And^BD^Lo^Uw^En^Tl^Ooa^Od^T.^H

165

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

Press Applications

Bluetooth

Select Bluetooth On.

and select

After you’ve finished using this setting,

remember to change it back to Hidden.

TIP Use the Visible option only when you need

your Centro to be accessible for an extended

period of time. For short-term accessibility,

use the Temporary option.

Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices

that are not on your Trusted Devices list

to request a connection with your

Centro during the next two minutes.

Your Centro reverts to the Hidden

setting and becomes inaccessible to

other devices after two minutes.

(Optional) Enter a device name that

identifies your Centro when it is

discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

Hidden: Allows only devices with which

you have previously formed a

partnership to request a connection

with your Centro. New devices cannot

request a connection.

NOTE Use the same device name for all

your Bluetooth connections. If you change

the device name, you need to re-create any

partnerships you’ve already created.

Enter the same passkey on your Centro

and on the Bluetooth device.

Select the Visibility pick list and select

one of the following:

Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that

are not on your Trusted Devices list to

request a connection with your Centro.

Your Centro remains accessible to other

devices until you turn this option off.

C O N N E C T I N G W I T H

Download^Bfr^Lo^Um^EW^{T O}w^Ow^T.S^Ho^Dm^Ea^Vn^Iu^Ca^Els^S.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

166

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,

such as headsets and GPS receivers, have

a predefined passkey. If your device has a

predefined passkey, you can find it in the

documentation for that device. Other

devices provide a screen where you enter

a passkey that you make up. In either case,

you must use the same passkey on both

your Centro and the other Bluetooth

device. We recommend that, where

possible, you make up a passkey of 16

alphanumeric characters (letters and

numerals only) to improve the security of

your Centro. The longer the passkey, the

more difficult it is for the passkey to be

deciphered.

(Optional) Check the Add to trusted

device list box if you want to form a

partnership with the requesting device.

Select OK.

W I T H

D E V I C E S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All^CM^Oa^Nn^Nu^Ea^Cls^TS^{I N}ea^Grch And^BD^Lo^Uw^En^Tl^Ooa^Od^T.^H

167

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

C O N N E C T I N G W I T H

Download^Bfr^Lo^Um^EW^{T O}w^Ow^T.S^Ho^Dm^Ea^Vn^Iu^Ca^Els^S.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

168

CHAPTER

Your photos, videos, and

music

Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,

and your most recent vacation?

Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?

Your Palm^®Centro^™smart device solves both problems. You can

keep your favorite photos right on your Centro—videos, too. And

there’s no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play

music on your Centro. Simply transfer songs onto your Centro or

an expansion card and then listen through your headphones (cards

and headphones sold separately).

Benefits

•

Never be far from your favorite

people, places, and songs

•

No separate photo viewer, MP3, or

CD player required

•

Organize your photos, videos, and

songs

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Pictures & Video s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 75

Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Press Applications

Camera

and select

Camera and

Camcorder

By default, the Camera application

stores pictures you take in the PALM

folder on your expansion card (if a card

is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores

pictures in the PALM album on your

Centro. To store a picture in a different

location, select one of the following:

Your Centro comes with an easy-to-use,

built-in, 1.3 Megapixel camera with 2x

digital zoom. You can use the camera to

take and view pictures and videos and

send them to your friends and family. To

add a personal touch to your Centro, use

your pictures as your wallpaper for the

Main tab in the Phone application and as

caller ID images.

<Album name>: Stores the picture in

the selected album. The storage

location is based on the location of the

album (Centro or expansion card).

New Albums: Opens a dialog box

where you can enter an album name

and select the storage location (Centro

or expansion card).

In addition to taking pictures and videos,

you can receive and view pictures and

videos, send pictures and videos as email

attachments or multimedia messages

(MMS), and use pictures to personalize

your Centro (such as wallpaper or picture

caller ID; see Assigning a caller ID photo

for details). You can also move pictures and

videos to a computer by synchronizing your

Centro with your computer.

Taking a picture

You can store pictures on your Centro or on

an expansion card.

A N D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc^Ch^AA^Mnd^{E R}D^Aownloa^Cd.^{A M C O R D E R}

171

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Saves the picture in the location

you selected in step 2.

TIP The default camera resolution is SXGA

(1280 x 1024). VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA

(320 x 240) resolutions are also supported. To

view these settings before you take a picture,

press Menu.

Deletes the picture.

Opens a dialog box where you

can select how you want to send

the picture: Messaging,

Bluetooth® wireless technology,

or Email. The receiving device

must support the method you

select.

Find your subject in the screen on your

Centro (the lens is on the back of your

Centro).

(Optional) To get a close-up of your

subject, press Up

to select 2x. Press

Down

to return to 1x.

Lets you add a voice caption.

Press Center

to capture the picture.

Select any of the following icons:

TIP To add an audio caption later, open the

picture and then select Audio Caption from

the Photo menu.

DID YOU KNOW

You can personalize a picture.

Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and

then use the drawing tools to add your own

personal touch. When you save the picture,

you can replace the original or save a copy.

Recording a video

You can store videos on your Centro or on

an expansion card.

C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Press Applications

Camcorder

and select

TIP The video recording screen displays the

approximate recording time you have left

based on the space available on your Centro

or expansion card. Actual recording time may

vary depending on how fast you are moving,

how many colors you are recording, and so

on.

TIP The default camcorder resolution is CIF

(352 x 288), and QCIF (176 x 144) is also

supported. To view these settings before you

capture a video, press Menu.

By default, the Camcorder application

stores videos you record in the PALM

folder on your expansion card (if a card

is inserted). Otherwise, Camcorder

stores pictures in the PALM album on

your Centro. To store a video in a

different location, select one of the

following:

Find your subject in the screen on your

Centro (the lens is on the back of your

Centro).

Press Center

After you finish recording, press

Center again to stop.

to start recording.

<Album name>: Stores the video in the

selected album. The storage location is

based on the location of the album

(Centro or expansion card).

New Albums: Opens a dialog box

where you can enter an album name

and select the storage location (Centro

or expansion card).

A N D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc^Ch^AA^Mnd^{E R}D^Aownloa^Cd.^{A M C O R D E R}

173

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Select any of the following:

TIP During playback, tap and drag the

progress indicator bar to jump to a different

section of the video. Select Pause to pause

video playback.

Customizing your Camera settings

You can customize the built-in camera’s

settings for your Centro.

Press Applications

and select

Camera

or Camcorder .

Plays the video, so you can

review it.

Press Menu

. If you are in Camera

View, the Photo Settings screen

appears. If you are in Camcorder View,

the Video Settings screen appears.

Saves the video in the location

you selected in step 2.

Deletes the video.

Set any of the following preferences:

Effects: Sets the color palette for the

current picture or video. You cannot

change an item’s palette after you take

the picture or video.

Opens a dialog box where you

can select how you want to send

the video: Messaging, Bluetooth,

or Email. The receiving device

must support the method you

select and video messages.

Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the

sound that plays before you take

the picture.

Opens a dialog box where you

can adjust the volume during

playback.

Shutter sound: Determines whether a

sound plays when you take a picture.

C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the

microphone on and off so that you can

record videos with or without sound.

Resolution: Sets the default size for

newly captured pictures or videos.

Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines

whether the date the picture is taken

appears on your pictures.

Select Done.

Review photos/videos: Determines

whether you can review pictures or

videos before saving them and how

quickly they are automatically saved.

Pictures & Videos

Auto naming: Assigns a name to a

series of pictures to be captured, such

as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.

Viewing a picture

In addition to viewing the pictures you

capture with the built-in camera, you can

view pictures captured on many popular

digital cameras or downloaded from the

Internet. Your Centro supports the

following picture formats:

•

JPG

TIF

BMP

GIF

P I C T U R E S

V I D E O S

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Press Applications

Pics&Videos

and select

Viewing a video

In addition to viewing the videos you

Select the album that contains the

picture you want to see.

capture with the built-in camcorder, you

can view videos captured on many popular

digital cameras. You can also play the audio

portion of multimedia files. Your Centro

supports the following types of video files:

TIP To view an album from an expansion card,

insert the card and select the album from the

Album list. If the items on the card are not

grouped into albums, select the card name

from the list.

•

3GP (with H.263 video and AMR audio)

3G2 (with MPEG-4 video and QCELP

audio)

Select the picture you want to view.

•

MP4 (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)

Press Right or Left to scroll to the

next item in the album.

MPG (with MPEG-1 video and MPEG-1

audio)

DID YOU KNOW To see the outer edges of a

M4V (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)

picture that may not be visible, use the stylus

to tap and drag the picture in any direction.

ASF (with MPEG-4 video and

IMA-ADPCM audio)

If the picture has a voice caption, select

to hear it.

•

AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)

Tap the picture or press Center

return to Thumbnail View.

Press Applications

Pics&Videos

and select

Select the album that contains the video

you want to see.

TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos

or videos to more easily locate them. Select

one of the grouping options from the View

menu.

Select the video you want to view.

Playback begins automatically.

P I C T U R E S

V I D E O S

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Hold down Right or Left to seek

within the current video, or press Right

or Left to scroll to the next item in

the album.

TIP To set slide show options such as

background music and transitions, open the

Options menu and select Slideshow

Setting. Keep in mind that background music

overrides audio captions when you’re running

a slide show. Background music for a slide

show also overrides any music that might be

playing using the Pocket Tunes^™Deluxe

application on your Centro.

Press Center

to return to Thumbnail

View.

DID YOU KNOW If you pause video playback

and then close the video, the video starts

where you left off the next time you play it.

Sending pictures or videos

Viewing a slide show

You can send pictures or videos to an

email address or to other devices that

support picture and video messaging.

Press Applications

Pics&Videos

Select the album you want to view.

Press Menu , select Options, and

and select

From the Album list, select the album

that contains the picture(s) or video(s)

you want to send.

then select Auto-hide Toolbar Off if

you want to see the toolbar.

Select Send

Press Space

to start the slide

Select the pictures or videos to send, or

select Select All to send the entire

album. (A plus sign [+] appears next to

selected items.)

show.

Press Center

to return to the

previous view.

DID YOU KNOW

You cannot send copyrighted

pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon

in Thumbnail View or in the Picture list.

P I C T U R E S

V I D E O S

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Select Send.

album. (A + appears next to selected

items.)

Select Copy.

Select the Copy items to pick list and

select whether you want to copy the

selected items to your device or to an

expansion card.

Indicates that

a picture is

selected

Select how you want to send the

picture or video: Messaging,

Bluetooth, or Email.

Copying a picture or video

You can copy pictures or videos into

another album. You can also copy pictures

and videos between your Centro and an

expansion card.

Select the Into album pick list and

select the album you want to copy the

selected items to.

From the Album list, select the album

that contains the picture(s) or video(s)

you want to copy.

Select Copy.

TIP You can also move pictures and videos

between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)

menu and select Move to. The remaining

steps are the same as those for copying

pictures, but use the Move commands

instead of the Copy commands.

Press Menu

Select Copy to from the Photo (or

Video) menu.

Select the pictures or videos to copy, or

select Select All to copy the entire

P I C T U R E S

V I D E O S

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Organizing pictures and videos

Display the picture you want to save as

wallpaper.

Open the album you want to organize.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Save

as Wallpaper.

Select Album, and then select Add to

album or Remove from album.

When the confirmation message

appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or

decline by selecting No.

Select the pictures or videos to add or

remove, or select Select All to add or

remove the entire album. (A plus sign

indicates that you want to add the item.

An X indicates that you want to remove

the item.)

Adding a picture to a contact entry

Display the picture you want to add to a

contact.

Select Add or Remove.

Press Menu

DID YOU KNOW You can also open the Album

list from Camera View or Camcorder View by

selecting the icon in the lower-left corner.

TIP Install the Palm^®Files application from the

Getting Started CD to easily browse and

manage files on an expansion card.

Select Options, and then select Save

as Contact.

Select the contact you want to add this

picture to.

Rotating a picture

TIP To change the name, add a caption, or

view other picture or video information,

highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo

(or Video) menu, and select Details.

Display the picture you want to rotate.

Press Menu

Select Rotate from the Photo menu.

Select the orientation.

Saving a picture as wallpaper

You can select a picture to use as wallpaper

for the Main tab in the Phone application.

P I C T U R E S

V I D E O S

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Deleting a picture or video

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use your

computer to view and edit videos you

captured on your Centro, you must first

install QuickTime from the Getting Started

CD.

Open the album that contains the

picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.

Press Menu

Select Delete from the Photo (or

Video) menu.

On a Windows computer, you can view

and edit synchronized pictures and videos

in the Palm Media desktop application.

Open Palm^®Desktop software and click

the Media icon. You can refer to the

Palm Desktop Online Help for information

about using the Palm Media desktop

application.

Select the pictures or videos that you

want to delete, or select Select All to

delete the entire album. (An X appears

next to selected items.)

Select Delete.

Select Delete to confirm the deletion.

TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in

Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace to

delete the highlighted item.

Pocket Tunes^™

Deluxe

Viewing pictures and videos on your

computer

You can listen to music through the

speaker on the back of your Centro or

through a stereo headset or headphones

(stereo headphone adapter or 2.5mm

stereo headphone or headset required,

sold separately). To listen to music on your

Centro, transfer the music files to your

Centro or an expansion card. After you

When you synchronize your Centro, your

pictures and videos are copied to your

desktop computer. You can view pictures in

JPG format and videos in MPEG-4 format

(3G2 file extension). You can email them to

friends using your desktop email

application.

P O C K E T

D E L U X E

^{T U}D^No^Ew^Sn^™load from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

transfer the music files, you can play them If album art is available, it appears in a

using Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe on your

Centro. Pocket Tunes Deluxe can also be

found under the name Music Player. (See

Exploring AT&T Music.)

corner of the Pocket Tunes Deluxe display.

When you select the album art, it expands

to fill the screen. Select the album art again

to return it to a corner of the screen.

Pocket Tunes Deluxe supports MP3,

WMA, Protected WMA, AAC, and AAC+

files; you can transfer these file types to

your device. For more information about

Pocket Tunes Deluxe, go to

BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Mac, you need

a microSD expansion card (sold separately)

to listen to music on your Centro. You

cannot transfer music files from your Mac

directly onto your Centro.

pocket-tunes.com/userguide/en/.

Connect your Centro to your computer

with the USB sync cable.

DID YOU KNOW

If a call comes in when you’re

listening to music, you can take the call and

the music pauses automatically. After you

finish the call, the music starts again.

On your Centro, press

Applications

pTunes

and select

If you are transferring music files from a

Mac, insert an expansion card into your

Centro. This step is optional for

Windows users.

Transferring music files from your

computer

If your music files are already on your

computer’s hard drive, you just need to

transfer them onto your Centro to listen to

them with Pocket Tunes Deluxe.

Do one of the following:

Windows: Open Windows Media

Player on your computer. Select the

Sync tab, and select Set Up Sync.

Select Finish. In the Sync tab, select

the files and play lists you want to sync

If an expansion card is inserted into the

Centro, Windows Media Player copies the

music files to the expansion card. If you

don’t have an expansion card inserted, the

music files are copied to your Centro.

T U N E S ™ D E L U X E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search^PA^On^Cd^KD^Eo^Twnload.

181

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

manually. Select Start Sync. The files

are transferred to your Centro.

Transferring music from a CD to your

Centro

WINDOWS ONLY

NOTE Do not press the sync button on

your cable. Windows Media Player

transfers the files, so there’s no need to do

anything.

On your computer, open Windows

Media Player.

Insert the music CD into your

computer’s CD drive.

Mac: Drag and drop the files onto the

Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm

folder. Select your device name, the file

name, and the destination (card). Click

OK. Synchronize your Centro with your

computer. Be patient; transferring music

to an expansion card can take several

minutes.

Select the Rip tab.

Select Rip Music.

Transfer files to your Centro as

described in T r ansferring music files

from your computer.

MAC ONLY

On your Mac, open iTunes.

Insert the music CD into the CD drive

on your Mac.

Click the Import button in the

upper-right corner of the iTunes window.

TIP You can also use a card reader accessory

(sold separately) to transfer music files from

your computer to your expansion card. Create

a Music_Audio folder in the root directory of

the card, and store your music files in this

folder.

When the songs have been imported,

click the Eject Disk button in the

lower-right corner of the iTunes window.

Transfer the files to your Centro as

described in T r ansferring music files

from your computer.

P O C K E T

D E L U X E

^{T U}D^No^Ew^Sn^™load from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

182

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Listening to music on your Centro

DID YOU KNOW

You can also press Space to

CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening

to this device at full volume for a long

period of time can damage your hearing.

pause and resume playback, as well as use

the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause

and resume playback.

Make sure the Ringer switch is set to

Sound On. See Silencing sounds for

more information.

NOTE To adjust the volume during

playback, press the Volume button on the

side of your Centro.

Press Applications

pTunes

and select

Progress

indicator

Play/Pause

Volume

TIP You can change the settings on your

Centro so that pressing and holding the Side

button opens Pocket Tunes Deluxe. See

Reassigning buttons for details.

Use the 5-way

to access any of

the following icons:

Play: Plays or resumes playback of

the current song.

song

Choose

song

Next song: Plays the next song.

Previous song: Plays the previous

song.

Pocket Tunes Deluxe continues playing

until it reaches the end of your list or until

you select Pause

play even if you switch to another

application or turn off your screen. If you

want to stop playing music when you exit

. Music continues to

Choose song: Displays a list of

songs to choose from.

Pause: Pauses playback.

T U N E S ™ D E L U X E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search^PA^On^Cd^KD^Eo^Twnload.

183

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

Pocket Tunes Deluxe, open the

Background Prefs menu and uncheck the

Enable background play box, and then

select OK.

TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket

Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select

Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,

and then select All.

Creating a playlist

Editing a playlist

If you want to play a group of songs in a

particular order, you can create a playlist.

Press Applications

pTunes

Press Menu

and select

Press Applications

pTunes

Press Menu

and select

Select Actions, and then select

Manage Playlists.

Select Actions, and then select

Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.

Manage Playlists.

Do any of the following:

Select New, and then enter a name for

the playlist.

• To delete a song from the playlist,

select the song and then select

Remove.

Select Add Song. Select the songs you

want to include on the playlist.

• To add a song, select Add Song,

select the songs you want to add, and

then select OK.

• To move a song up or down one slot,

select a song and then select Up or

Down.

Select Save List.

P O C K E T

D E L U X E

^{T U}D^No^Ew^Sn^™load from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

TIP To delete a playlist, select Manage

Playlists from the Actions menu, select the

playlist, and then select Delete. Select Ye s to

confirm the deletion.

T U N E S ™ D E L U X E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search^PA^On^Cd^KD^Eo^Twnload.

185

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

P O C K E T

D E L U X E

^{T U}D^No^Ew^Sn^™load from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

186

CHAPTER

Your personal information

organizer

Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those

scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm^®Centro^™smart device is all you

need to organize your personal information and keep it with you

wherever you go.

You never lose your information, even if your battery is

completely drained. All your personal info is backed up each

time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you

use the security features on your Centro. Also, you can easily

share info with others electronically.

Benefits

•

Track current, future, and past

appointments

•

Set reminders for appointments,

birthdays, important tasks, and

•

Make to-do lists that get done

Before you call your friend in

London, check the time

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Calenda r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 89

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

T a sks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

overdue or due today. If there’s room,

Agenda View also lists events on future

dates.

Calendar

Calendar is a powerful organizer application

that helps you manage your schedule. You

can view your calendar by day, week, or

month, or as an agenda list that combines

your Tasks list and email notifications with

your appointments. Schedule repeating

meetings or a block of vacation time by

creating an event that repeats at an interval

you specify. Color-code your appointments

by category and add notes with helpful

information.

Day View: Shows your daily schedule one

day at a time.

Week View: Shows your schedule for an

entire week. The time frames are based on

the Start Time and End Time settings in

Calendar Preferences.

Month View: Shows your schedule for a

whole month.

DID YOU KNOW If your company uses

Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be

able to wirelessly synchronize Calendar

events directly with the server. See Working

with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® for

information.

In most Calendar views, you can do the

following:

•

Open the Options menu and select

Year View to view a calendar for an

entire year.

Displaying your calendar

Press Calendar

repeatedly to cycle

through the various views:

•

Use the 5-way

to go to another

day, week, month, or year—based on

the current view. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

Agenda View: Shows your daily schedule,

the number of unread email messages,

and any items on your Tasks list that are

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C A L E N D A R}

189

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

•

Select Go To, and then select a date

from the calendar. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

Using the keyboard, enter a starting

hour and minute for the event, such as

545 for 5:45.

Select the End Time box and enter the

ending hour and minute for the event.

Creating an event

To assign a time zone to the event,

select the Time Zone pick list and

select a city in the time zone you want.

TIP If you have several appointments to enter,

it’s more efficient to use Palm^®Desktop

software or Microsoft Outlook on your

computer and then synchronize your Centro

with your computer. For more information,

see Synchronizing information—the basics.

Select OK.

Enter a description for the event.

IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop

software, do not add time zones to your

events. Palm Desktop does not support

time zones.

Press Calendar

appears.

until Day View

Select Go To and then select the

desired day.

If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use

the time zone feature, but you must install

the conduit that came with your Centro (or

a subsequent update) on all the computers

with which you sync your Centro. Chapura

PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft

Outlook conduits do not support time

zones.

Selected

date

Selected

day

Select New.

^{C A L E N D A R}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Select OK.

TIP To automatically assign a time zone to your

events, open the Options menu, select

Preferences, and check the New events use

time zones box. All your new events will be

assigned to your local time zone (existing

events aren’t affected), and you can change

the time zone setting for individual events.

Type of time

units

Number of

time units

TIP If you want your events with time zones to

stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless

of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time

Preferences, select the Automatically set

pick list, and select Date and time. If you

select Date, time and time zone, the event

time shifts if you travel to a different time

zone. See Setting the date and time for

information.

DID YOU KNOW

When an alarm occurs, the

Alert dialog box displays all your pending

alerts. Select an alert description to jump to

that item, or check the box to clear that alert.

Creating an untimed event

Adding an alarm to an event

An untimed event, such as a holiday or

deadline, does not occur at a particular

time.

In Calendar, select the event.

Select Details.

Check the Alarm box and select the

number of minutes, hours, or days

before the event you would like to

receive the alarm.

Press Calendar

Day View.

until you are in

Press Left or Right to go to the

date of the event.

Make sure no times are highlighted.

TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by

minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the

date of the event.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C A L E N D A R}

191

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Enter a description for the event.

A diamond appears next to the

description of an untimed event.

select Other to define a custom

interval.

Select OK.

Scheduling a repeating event

Repeating

event

TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this

info to the person’s Contacts entry and it

automatically appears in your Calendar.

TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed

event. Then, from the Details screen, select

Every year as the repeat interval.

Create an event, and then select it.

DID YOU KNOW

If you sync with Microsoft

Outlook and your events include other people,

a With field appears in the Details dialog box

and your attendee info appears in this field

after you sync.

Select Details.

Select the Repeat pick list, and then

select a repeat interval. If the interval

you need doesn’t appear on the list,

^{C A L E N D A R}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

192

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Color-coding your schedule

Changing or deleting an event

Use color-coding to quickly spot various

types of events. For example, make

appointments with family green,

co-workers blue, and friends red. Follow

these steps to create a category and

assign it a color code.

Select the event you want to edit or

delete.

Select Details.

In addition to the settings covered

earlier in this chapter, you can also

change any of the following settings:

In Day View, select an event description

or select an empty time slot.

Date and Time: Displays when the

event takes place. Change these

settings to reschedule the event.

Select Details.

Select the Category pick list and select

Edit Categories.

Location: Provides a description of

where the event takes place.

Do one of the following:

Category: Sets the color-coded

category for this event.

• To create a new category, select New

and then enter a category name.

Note

: Provides space for you to

• To add a color to an existing category,

select a category and select Edit.

enter additional text.

Delete: Removes the event from your

calendar.

Select the color you want to give this

category, and then select OK.

(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add

or edit more categories.

Select OK.

TIP To save memory, you can purge your old

events. Open the Record menu and select

Purge. Select the Delete events older than

pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.

Select OK two more times.

Now that the categories are set up with

colors, you can assign categories to your

events to color-code them. See the next

section for details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C A L E N D A R}

193

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Customizing display options for your

calendar

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Display Options.

Select the Default View pick list and

select the view you want to see when

you open Calendar.

Select Agenda and set any of the

following options:

Select Day and set any of the following

options:

Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are

due today and the tasks that are

overdue appear in Agenda View.

Show Category List: The Category pick

list appears in Day View.

Show Time Bars: The time bars appear

in Day View to show the duration of an

event and to illustrate event conflicts.

Show Messages: The number of read

and unread email messages is displayed

in Agenda View.

Compress Day View: When this box is

unchecked, all time slots appear on the

screen. When this box is checked, start

and end times appear for each event,

but blank time slots near the bottom of

the screen disappear to minimize

scrolling.

Background: A favorite photo becomes

the Agenda View background. Check

the Background box, select the image

placeholder, and then select a photo.

Adjust the fade setting so that the text

is easy to read against the photo.

Show Category Column: The

color-coded category marker appears

between the time and the description to

^{C A L E N D A R}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

indicate under which category the event

is filed.

Select OK.

TIP You can customize your Centro to display

the most current Calendar event in the Main

tab in the Phone application. Press Phone,

open the Options menu, and then select

Phone Display Options. Check the Show

Calendar event box.

Select Month and set any of the

following options:

Show Category List: The Category pick

list appears in Month View.

Timed Events: The events that are

scheduled for a specific time appear in

Month View.

Selecting alarm tones

Press Menu

Untimed Events: The events that are

scheduled for a specific date but not a

specific time appear in Month View.

Select Options, and then select Sound

Preferences.

Select the Application pick list and

select Calendar.

Daily Repeating Events: The events

that repeat every day appear in Month

View.

Select the Volume pick list and select

the volume level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. ^{C A L E N D A R}

195

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Select the Vibrate pick list and select

when you want your Centro to vibrate

for an event alarm.

TIP You can also record sounds and use them

as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &

Alerts Preferences screen.

Select tones from any of the following

pick lists:

•

To record a sound, select New.

To play a sound, select it and press Center

Alarm Sound: The tone that plays the

first time your alarm goes off.

on the 5-way.

•

To delete a sound, select it and press

Backspace.

Reminder Sound: The tone that plays if

an alarm is not acknowledged and

the alarm repeats itself.

To send a sound, select it and then select

Send.

DID YOU KNOW

Your Centro includes a silent

Repeat: The number of times the alarm

repeats itself if the alarm is not

acknowledged.

alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer

switch is set to Sound Off.

Default Alarm: A default amount of

time before the event for which the

alarm goes off.

World Clock

World Clock displays the day and time in

three cities anywhere around the globe.

Whether you’re traveling or staying home,

it’s easy to keep track of the best time to

reach your business associates, friends,

and family in faraway places.

Select Done.

W O R L D C L O C K

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Selecting cities

World Clock shows the system date and

time above the world map. If you selected

the option to get the date and time from

the mobile network (see Setting the date

and time), the AT&T network automatically

updates the time display to match the local

time when you travel.

TIP If you did not select the option to get the

date and time from the mobile network, you

can set the city at the top of the screen to a

fixed location.

DID YOU KNOW

You can run your stylus over

the map to see the time in other cities. The

shadow over the map represents nighttime

moving across the globe.

TIP World Clock does not automatically update

the system time for daylight-saving time. To

change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see

Setting the date and time.

Below the world map, you can view the

time in two other cities.

TIP If you travel a lot, you may want to select

your home city as one of these two cities, so

that you always know what time it is at home.

Adding cities

If the city you want to display is not in the

predefined list, you can add it.

Press Applications

World Clock

and select

Select a City pick list and select Edit

List.

Select a City pick list, and select a city

in the same time zone.

Select Add.

Select a location in the same time zone

as the city you want to add, and then

select OK.

W O R L D C L O C K

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Enter the name of the city.

Tasks

Select Location, select Map, select the

location of the city, and then select OK.

You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks

you need to complete and to keep a record

of when you finish tasks.

If the city is not on daylight-saving time,

uncheck this box. If daylight-saving time

is observed, enter Start and End dates.

Select OK, and then select Done.

Adding a task

Press Applications

Tasks

and select

Setting an alarm

The next time you travel, don’t rely on a

hotel alarm clock to get you to that

important meeting. Use your Centro

instead. World Clock includes a built-in

alarm feature that you can use as a travel

alarm.

Select New to create a new task.

Select Off in the upper-right corner.

Select the time you want the alarm to

sound.

Select OK.

Enter a description of the task. The text

can be longer than one line.

TIP To customize the alarm sound and volume,

open the Options menu and select Alarm

Preferences.

Setting task priority, due date, and other

details

TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to

Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.

The Details dialog box enables you to

assign a priority level, due date, category,

privacy flag, and other details for each task.

T A S K S

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Select the task to which you want to

assign details.

repeating task, the next instance of this

task automatically appears in your task

list.

Select Details.

Set any of the following:

Private: Check this box to mark this

task private. See Working with private

entries for additional information.

Priority: Select the priority number for

this task (1 is the most important). Later

you can arrange your tasks based on the

importance of each task.

: Select this button to enter

additional text that you want to

associate with the task.

TIP You can also select the priority from the

Tasks list by selecting the number next to a

task and then selecting a priority level.

Category: Assign the task to a specific

category.

Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list

and select a due date for the task.

Select OK.

TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option

in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can

select the due date in the Tasks list to set a

new date.

TIP Press Menu to access other features such

as importing phone numbers into the Tasks

list.

Checking off a task

Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.

Select the task you want to check off.

Repeat: Indicate whether the task

occurs at regular intervals and how

often it repeats. When you check off a

Press Center

or tap in the box to

check off the task.

T A S K S

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Organizing your tasks

In the Tasks list, select one of these

options:

All: Displays all your tasks.

Date: Displays tasks that are due in a

specific time frame. With Date selected,

press Down

then press Center

to select the pick list, and

to see the various

options: Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7

Days, or Past Due.

TIP If you accidentally check off a task and

need to uncheck it, highlight the task again

and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.

Category: Displays tasks that are assigned

to the selected category. Select the

Category pick list to select a different

category.

TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that

you completed a task, and you can select to

show or hide completed tasks. Completed

tasks remain in the memory of your Centro

until you purge them.

DID YOU KNOW

Overdue tasks have an

exclamation point (!) next to the due date.

T A S K S

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

Deleting a task

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Select the task you want to delete.

Press Menu

Set any of the following preferences:

Sort by: Indicates the order in which

your tasks appear in the list.

Select Delete Task from the Record

menu.

Select OK.

Show Completed Tasks: Displays

tasks you’ve checked off.

TIP To save memory, you can purge all

completed tasks. Open the Record menu and

select Purge. Select OK.

Record Completion Date: Replaces

the due date with the completion date

when you complete (check off) the task.

Customizing Tasks

Show Due Dates: Displays task due

dates and inserts an exclamation point

(!) next to overdue tasks.

The Tasks Preferences screen enables you

to control the appearance of the Tasks list

screen.

Show Priorities: Displays the priority

setting for each task.

In the Tasks list screen, press

Show Categories: Displays the

category for each task.

Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the

alarms you assign to your tasks.

Select OK.

DID YOU KNOW

You can display your tasks in

your calendar. See Customizing display

options for your calendar for details.

T A S K S

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

T A S K S

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Your memos and documents

With its ability to store large amounts of important information,

your Palm^®Centro^™smart device lets you take your office with

you—including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can

keep updated copies of the files on both your Centro and your

computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient

location any time.

Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to

type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and

other important thoughts, and play them back, right on your

Centro. You can even send your notes and voice memos to a

friend or colleague by attaching them to an email or multimedia

message.

Benefits

•

Manage Word, Excel^®, PowerPoint,

and PDF files on your Centro

•

Capture thoughts on the fly

•

Improve productivity by taking

important docs, spreadsheets, and

presentations with you

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Documents T o G o^®Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Voice Mem o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 07

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

Documents To Go^®

Professional

an upgrade that supports Office 2007, go to

dataviz.com/office2007 (additional fees

may apply).

If you install the Documents To Go desktop

software (from the Getting Started CD),

you can use Documents To Go to transfer

files from your computer to your Centro

when you synchronize.

NOTE The Getting Started CD includes a

link to the Documents To Go^®desktop

software. On your Centro, the companion

for Documents To Go is named Documents

and it’s already installed on your Centro.

Here are a few more examples of what you

can do with Documents:

With the Documents application, you can

take your important office info with you.

You can carry, create, view, and edit

Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on

your Centro. You can also view, carry, and

manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For

example, you can open email attachments,

files you download with the web browser,

and files stored on an expansion card—as

long as the files are in a supported format.

•

Send and receive email attachments in

Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat

file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

•

View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

Create or edit a Word-compatible

document or Excel-compatible

spreadsheet on your Centro, and then

save it in the native DOC or XLS format.

NOTE The version of Documents To Go

that comes with your Centro supports

viewing of Microsoft Office 2007

documents. To edit Office 2007 files on

your Centro, you must save the files in

Office 2003 format. For information about

•

Create a PowerPoint presentation on

your computer, use the Documents To

Go desktop application to optimize the

file for your Centro, and then sync the

file onto your Centro to view it on the

go.

D O C U M E N T S T O G O ^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Down^Plo^Ra^Od.^{F E S S I O N A L}

205

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

NOTE The Documents application does

not support some editing functions, such

as multiple font sizes and spell checking.

TIP For more info on the Documents

application on your Centro, go to dataviz.com.

If you installed the desktop application from

the Getting Started CD, you can also click the

Documents To Go icon on your computer,

and then click Help.

Select the document you want from the

list.

TIP Install the Files application from the

Getting Started CD to easily browse and

manage files on an expansion card.

TIP When you work on a file on your Centro,

you can save it to your Centro or to an

expansion card. Open the File menu, select

Save As, and then select the location where

you want to save the file.

Opening a document

In the Documents application, you can

view and open any Word, Excel,

PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your

Centro or on an expansion card that is

inserted into the expansion slot.

Memos

Press Applications

Documents

and select

Memos are a great way to store notes on

your Centro.

DID YOU KNOW

Each memo can include 4,096

characters of text.

M E M O S

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

Creating a memo

Voice Memo

Press Applications

Memos

and select

Voice Memo provides a place for you to

record and play back notes and other

important thoughts directly on your Centro.

Enter the text you want to appear in the

memo.

Select Done.

Creating a voice memo

When recording a voice memo, hold your

Centro with the screen facing you while

you’re speaking.

Press Applications

Voice Memo

Select and begin speaking to record

and select

your memo.

When you are finished recording, select

TIP You can assign categories to your memos.

Open the memo you want to change, select

the category pick list at the top of the screen,

and select a category.

The memo is automatically saved to

your Centro.

(Optional) Press Menu

and select

Rename Memo from the Voice Memo

menu. Enter a title for the memo.

Deleting a memo

Open the memo you want to delete.

Press Menu

TIP If you are not using Push to Talk, you can

reassign the Side button to start recording in

Voice Memo. See Reassigning buttons.

Select Delete Memo from the Record

menu.

Select OK.

V O I C E M E M O

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

TIP If you need to pause while recording,

press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release

the button to resume recording.

TIP To adjust the volume level, press the

Volume button on the side of your Centro.

TIP To change a voice memo title, open the

Voice Memo menu and select Rename

Memo.

DID YOU KNOW You can use a voice memo as

a ringtone. Highlight the voice memo in the

list, open the Voice Memo menu, and then

select Copy to Ringtone.

DID YOU KNOW

You can send a voice memo in

an email or MMS message (see the

documentation for your email application, or

Creating and sending a multimedia message).

You can also use Bluetooth^®wireless

technology to send a voice memo to a nearby

Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a

Bluetooth wireless connection).

Listening to a voice memo

Press Applications

Voice Memo

and select

In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the

voice memo title and then press

Center

to select it. The voice memo

begins to play.

Press Center

to pause or stop

playback.

V O I C E M E M O

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER

Your application and

info management tools

Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up

info on your Palm^®Centro^™smart device. Synchronizing simply

means that info you entered or updated in one place (your

Centro or your computer) is automatically updated in the other.

There’s no need to enter info twice.

Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and

limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply

use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and

to install and run games and other software, from dictionaries

to travel guides.

Benefits

•

Locate info in your applications

with the Find feature

•

Quickly enter, update, and protect

your info on your computer and

your Centro

•

Install applications, games, and

other software

Store, carry, and exchange info

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 1

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 1

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Installing application s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 14

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Sending information with Bluetooth^®wireless technology . . . . . . . 218

Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Using Find

The Find feature locates any text in the

built-in applications and databases and

in some third-party applications. The Find

feature searches for the group of

characters you specify, including characters

that are part of a word. Find is not

case-sensitive.

Viewing and using

the alerts

DID YOU KNOW Find locates any word that

begins with the text you enter. For example,

entering “plane” finds “planet” but not

“airplane.”

The Alert dialog box on your Centro shows

info about incoming items, such as new

messages and Calendar events. An alert

also notifies you when you miss a phone

call.

Press Option , and then press Shift/

Find

to open the Find dialog box.

Enter the text you want to find.

Select OK to start the search.

To view the Alert dialog box, tap the

In the search results, select the text you

want to review, or select Find More to

continue the search.

blinking bell

with your stylus when it

appears in the upper-left corner of any

screen, or press and hold Center

when

the blinking bell appears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^U. ^{S I N G F I N D}

211

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

In the Alert dialog box, you can do any of

the following:

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.

•

Check the box next to the alert to

remove it from the list.

•

Select the alert to open the

corresponding application and view the

alert item (message, event, missed call,

and so on).

•

Select Done to close the Alert dialog

box. The alert remains active and the

bell continues to blink in the upper-left

corner of the screen.

Select Clear All to delete all alerts in

the Alert dialog box.

Calculator

Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus

an advanced calculator with scientific,

financial, and conversion functions.

TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right

on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In

Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to

cycle between functions, and press Left on

the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.

Switching between Basic and Advanced

Calculator Modes

Press Applications

Calc

and select

DID YOU KNOW

You can tap the onscreen

number pad or use the keyboard to input

numbers.

C A L C U L A T O R

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Selecting functions in Advanced

Calculator Mode

Length: Length conversions for metric

and English values.

Switch to Advanced Mode (see the

preceding procedure).

Area: Area conversions for metric,

traditional, and English values.

Press Menu

Volume: Volume conversions for metric

and English values.

Select Options, and then select the

type of function you want to use:

Press Menu

Math: Advanced mathematical

functions such as exponents, roots, and

logarithms.

Select Pref, and then select the decimal

display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),

or Eng(x).

Trig: Trigonometric functions such as

sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.

Press Menu

Select Pref, and then select the number

display format: Degrees, Radians, or

Grads.

Finance: Financial calculator functions

such as APR and amortization.

Logic: Hexadecimal characters in

keypad, plus logic functions such as

And, Not, Or, and Xor.

TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten

memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored

number.

Statistics: Statistical functions such as

sum, factorial, and random number

generator.

TIP Select Con to access a list of

mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s

number or the speed of light.

Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature

conversions for metric and English

values.

C A L C U L A T O R

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

need to download the software to your

Installing applications

computer first. See Installing bonus

software from My Palm on your computer

for info on installing software that includes

a desktop component.

Your Centro comes with several built-in and

ready-to-use applications. You can also

install additional applications, such as

business software, games, and more. The

Getting Started CD includes several bonus

software apps, and you can purchase other

third-party Palm OS^®by ACCESS apps as

well. To learn about applications you can

add to your Centro, go to go.palm.com/

centro-att/.

Press Applications

My Centro

Select the Bonus tab.

and select

Select the Install link below the name

of the application you want to install.

Repeat step 3 to install additional

applications.

NOTE The instructions in this section tell

you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS

application) and PDB (Palm OS database)

files on your Centro. Some Palm OS

software uses an installer or wizard to

guide you through the process. For details,

consult the documentation that came with

the software.

Installing applications from the Internet

You can use the web browser on your

Centro to install Palm OS files (PRC or

PDB) directly from the Internet. When you

download a PRC or PDB file, it is

automatically installed on your Centro. If a

file is compressed (for example, as a ZIP or

SIT file), you need to download it to your

computer, expand the file, and then

synchronize to transfer the expanded file to

your Centro.

Installing bonus software from My Centro

on your device

My Centro lets you download and install

software that you can use on your Centro.

If the software has a desktop component

in addition to a Centro component, you

NOTE Make sure the application you

download is compatible with your device.

I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Open the web browser (see Viewing a

web page).

Installing other third-party applications

from a computer

Go to the page that contains the link to

the application you want to download.

When you download an application to your

computer, it is probably in a compressed

format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is

compressed, you need to use a

decompression utility on your computer,

such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,

before you install the application on your

Centro.

Press Left or Right to highlight the

link to the file, and then press

Center

to initiate the download

process.

Follow the onscreen instructions to

accept and install the application.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app

from your computer to your Centro,

you must first install Palm^®Desktop

software on your computer (see Installing

the desktop synchronization software).

Installing bonus software from My Palm

on your computer

On your computer, go to go.palm.com/

centro-att/.

Follow the onscreen instructions to

download the application(s) you want to

install.

Windows: Select Start > Programs >

Palm > Install Tool, and then select

Add to browse to the application you

want to add.

When prompted to select either Save or

Run, select Run to place the

application(s) in the install queue.

Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the

Send To Device droplet in the Palm

folder.

Synchronize your Centro with your

computer to install the application(s) on

your Centro.

I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Select your device name from the User Mac:

list, and then click OK.

In the menu for Palm Desktop software,

click HotSync.

Synchronize your Centro with your

computer to install the application(s) on

your Centro.

Select Install Handheld files, and then

select expansion card as the file’s

destination.

Installing third-party applications from a

computer to an expansion card

Getting help with third-party applications

You can install an application to an

expansion card rather than to your Centro.

If you encounter a problem (such as an

error message) with a third-party

application, contact the application’s author

or vendor. For general troubleshooting of

third-party applications, see Third-party

applications.

Windows:

Select Start > Programs > Palm >

Install Tool.

Select your device name from the User

list.

Select Add and browse to the

application you want to add.

Removing

applications

Select Change Destination and select

the expansion card.

Select OK.

If you decide that you no longer need an

application, or you want to free up

memory, you can remove apps from your

Centro or an expansion card (for more on

expansion cards, see Inserting an

Synchronize your Centro with your

computer to install the application(s) on

your Centro.

expansion card). You can remove only

apps, patches, and extensions that you

A P P L I C A T I O N S

^{R E M O V I N G}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

install; you cannot remove the built-in apps

that reside in the ROM portion of your

Centro.

Synchronize to remove the application

from the Backup subfolder on your

computer.

Manually deleting applications

DID YOU KNOW Some applications are factory

installed on your Centro and cannot be

deleted. These are listed with a Lock icon next

to them.

If an app you delete reappears on your

Centro, you may need to manually delete

the app from your computer.

DID YOU KNOW

Applications deleted from your

Locate your Backup subfolder on your

Centro are kept on your computer in the

Archive folder of your user folder. If you have

trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t

find my user folder.

computer.

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>.

Mac: Mac

HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device

name>.

Press Applications

If you want to remove an application

from an expansion card, insert the card

into your Centro.

If you upgraded from a previous version

of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder

may be located in the palmOne or

Handspring folder.

Press Menu

Select Delete on the App menu.

Select the Delete From pick list and

select the location of the application you

want to remove: Phone or <card

name>.

If you find a PRC or PDB file for the

application you just removed, delete the

file from the Backup subfolder.

Delete the file from your device again.

Select the application that you want to

remove.

Select Delete, and then select Yes to

confirm deletion.

R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Size: The size (in kilobytes) of

applications and information on your

Centro.

Viewing application

info

Records: The number of entries in

various applications on your Centro.

The Info screens display basic statistics

about the applications on your Centro.

Scroll to the application you want to see

info about.

Press Applications

Press Menu

Select Done.

Select Info on the App menu.

Select the Device pick list and select

the location of the app you want to view

info for: Phone or <card name>.

Sending information

with Bluetooth^®

wireless technology

At the bottom of the screen, select the

type of information you want to view:

The range of Bluetooth^®wireless

technology is up to 30 feet in optimum

environmental conditions. Performance

and range may be affected by physical

obstacles, radio interference from nearby

electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP Check your battery level before

Version: The version numbers of

applications on your Centro.

establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.

If the battery level is very low, you can’t make

a Bluetooth wireless connection.

V I E W I N G

I N F O

^AD^{P P}ow^{L I}n^Clo^Aa^Td^{I O}fr^Nom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless

connection

Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless

connection

In most applications, you can send an

individual entry or item such as a contact or

a picture. You can also send all the entries

in a category, such as all contacts in the

Business category.

Press Applications

Bluetooth

and select

Select Bluetooth On.

Press Applications

Press Menu

Press Applications

Bluetooth

and select

Select Send from the App menu.

Select the Send From pick list and

select the location of the app you want

to send: Phone or <card name>.

Select Bluetooth On.

Open an application.

Select the entry or category you want to

send. You cannot send an item that has

Select the application you want to

transfer. You cannot send an item that

a lock

next to it.

has a lock

next to it.

Press Menu

Select Send.

Select Send from the leftmost menu.

Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.

10 Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK.

Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK.

11 Wait for a message to indicate that the

transfer is complete before you

continue using your Centro.

Wait for a message to indicate that the

transfer is complete before you

continue using your Centro.

W I T H B L U E T O O T H ^®W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y

Download f^Sro^Em^{N D}W^{I N}w^Gw.^IS^No^Fm^Oa^Rn^Mua^Al^Ts.^Ic^Oo^Nm. All Manuals Search And Download.

219

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless

connection

Use the other device to discover your

Centro and send information to it:

Press Applications

Bluetooth

Select Bluetooth On.

and select

• See the other device’s documentation

to learn how to discover and send

information over a Bluetooth wireless

connection.

Select the Visibility pick list and select

• If the Ringer switch is set to Sound

On, your Centro beeps to notify you of

the connection and then prompts you

to accept the info. Select a category

or expansion card to file the item(s). If

you don’t select a category, the

one of the following:

Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that

are not on your Trusted Devices list to

request a connection with your Centro.

Your Centro remains accessible to other

devices until you turn this option off.

After you’ve finished using this setting,

remember to change it back to Hidden.

item(s) goes into the Unfiled category.

Select Ye s to receive the information or

No to refuse it.

Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices

that are not on your Trusted Devices list

to request a connection with your

Centro during the next two minutes.

Your Centro reverts to the Hidden

setting and becomes inaccessible to

other devices after two minutes.

TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is

the name other devices with Bluetooth

wireless technology see when they connect

to your Centro. The default name is the name

you gave your device during setup. You can

change this name if you want to.

DID YOU KNOW

When you receive an

application over a Bluetooth connection, you

can store the application on your Centro or

send it to an expansion card inserted into the

expansion card slot.

S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N

B L U E T O O T H ^®W I R E L E S S

Download from^WW^Iw^Tw^H.Somanuals.com. All Manua^Tls^ES^Ce^Ha^Nrc^Oh^LA^On^Gd^YDownload.

220

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Open the application that holds the

entry you want to beam.

Beaming information

Select the entry or category you want to

beam. You cannot beam an item that

Your Centro is equipped with an IR

(infrared) port so that you can beam

information to another device with an IR

port—provided the other device supports

IR communications with Palm OS devices.

The IR port is located on the side of your

Centro, next to the expansion card slot,

behind the small dark shield.

has a lock

icon next to it.

Press Menu

Select Record, and then select one of

the following:

Beam: Sends an individual record.

Beam Category: Sends all entries in

the current category.

TIP For best results, the path between the

two devices must be clear of obstacles, and

both devices must be stationary. If you have

difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and

avoid bright sunlight.

DID YOU KNOW

If you beam a bookmark or

saved page from the web browser, it beams

the URL, not the contents of that page.

When the Beam Status dialog box

appears, point the IR port on your

Centro directly at the IR port of the

receiving device.

Beaming an entry

You can beam an individual entry or item

such as a contact or a picture. You can also

beam all the entries in the selected

category, such as all the contacts in the

Business or Family category.

Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to

indicate that the transfer is complete

before you continue using your Centro.

TIP Once you set up your business card, you

can beam it in two key presses: From the

Main tab in the Phone application, press

Menu, and then press M.

B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Centro directly at the IR port of the

receiving device.

Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to

indicate that the transfer is complete

before you continue using your Centro.

Receiving beamed information

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the

Beam Receive option in Power

Preferences is set to On. See Optimizing

power settings for details.

Beaming an application

Not all applications can be beamed. A lock

icon appears on the Beam screen next

to applications that cannot be beamed.

Turn on your screen.

Select the beam command on the

transmitting device.

Press Applications

Press Menu

Point the IR port on your Centro directly

at the IR port of the transmitting device

to open the Beam Status dialog box.

Select Beam from the App menu.

Select the Beam From pick list and

select the location of the application you

want to beam: Phone or <card name>.

When the Beam Status dialog box

appears, select a category for the entry.

Select Ye s to receive the information or

No to refuse it.

Select the application you want to

transfer.

Select Beam.

When the Beam Status dialog box

appears, point the IR port on your

B E A M I N G

^ID^No^Fw^On^Rl^Moa^Ad^Tf^Ir^Oom^NWww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

synchronization, you can turn off

synchronization for Memos.

TIP If you do not select a category when you

receive a beamed item, the item is placed in

the Unfiled category.

TIP Windows If you set up your Centro to

sync with Outlook, you can learn how to

change which applications synchronize and

change their synchronization settings by doing

the following: Click the HotSync manager

icon in the taskbar and select Custom. Select

a conduit that syncs with Outlook, click

Change, and then click Help.

TIP If you can’t receive beamed info, make

sure that you are not running a third-party app

that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive

a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your

Centro).

DID YOU KNOW You can store a beamed app

on your Centro or send it to an expansion card

inserted into the expansion card slot.

WINDOWS ONLY

Click HotSync^®manager

taskbar in the lower-right corner of your

screen.

in the

Synchronizing

information—

advanced

Select Custom.

Select your device name from the User

list at the top of the screen.

Changing which applications sync

Select the application for which you

want to turn synchronization on or off,

and then click Change.

By default, information from Calendar,

Contacts, Memos, Pictures & Videos, and

Tasks is updated each time you

synchronize your Centro. You can change

which applications synchronize. For

example, if you don’t use the Memos

application and you want to speed up

Select Synchronize the files to turn on

synchronization for an app.

Select Do nothing to turn off

synchronization for an app that currently

synchronizes (for example, to turn off

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

synchronization for Memos if you do not

use this app).

(Optional) If you want to make this

change permanent, check the Set as

default box. Otherwise, your change

affects only one synchronization (the

next one you do); thereafter, the

synchronization action reverts to what it

was before the change.

Click OK.

(Optional) To turn synchronization on or

off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,

and 7 for each application you want to

change.

Click Done.

NOTE If you want the information in one

location (on your Centro or on your

MAC ONLY

computer) to completely replace the

information in the other location for that

app, select one of the two overwrite

options. For example, if the Calendar info

on your Centro is accurate but the info on

your computer has become corrupted,

select Handheld overwrites Desktop for

the Calendar app to have your Centro info

replace your computer info. Note that

“handheld” refers to your Centro and

“desktop” refers to your computer.

Double-click the Palm Desktop

in the Palm folder.

icon

From the HotSync menu, select

Conduit Settings.

From the User pop-up menu, select

your device name.

Select the application for which you

want to turn synchronization on or off,

and then click Conduit Settings.

Select Synchronize the files to turn on

synchronization for an app.

I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Iw^Nn^Gload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Select Do nothing to turn off

synchronization for an app that currently

synchronizes (for example, to turn off

synchronization for Memos if you do not

use this app).

(Optional) If you want to make this

change permanent, click Make Default.

Otherwise, your change affects only

one synchronization (the next one you

do); thereafter, the synchronization

action reverts to what it was before the

change.

Click OK.

(Optional) To turn synchronization on or

off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,

and 7 for each application you want to

change.

Close the Conduit Settings window.

Setting up a Bluetooth connection for

synchronization

NOTE If you want the information in one

location (Centro or computer) to

If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth

wireless technology, you can synchronize

wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.

completely replace the information in the

other location for that app, select one of

the two overwrite options. For example, if

the Calendar info on your Centro is

accurate but the info on your Mac has

become corrupted, select Handheld

overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar

app to have your Centro info replace the

info on your Mac. Note that “handheld”

refers to your Centro.

Press Applications

Bluetooth

Select Bluetooth On.

and select

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

TIP After you form a partnership with a device,

you can change the Visibility setting back to

Hidden. That way only devices with which

you’ve already formed a partnership can find

your Centro. New devices cannot request a

connection.

Select Setup Devices.

Select HotSync Setup.

(Optional) Enter a device name that

identifies your Centro when it is

discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

TIP The device name you enter is the name

other devices with Bluetooth wireless

technology see when they connect to your

Centro. The default name is the name you

gave your device during setup. You can

change this name if you want to.

Follow the onscreen instructions to

create a partnership between your

Centro and your computer. In some

cases you may need to perform setup

steps on your computer before you can

complete this step. Check your

computer’s documentation for specific

setup instructions.

NOTE Use the same device name for all

your Bluetooth connections. If you change

the device name, you need to re-create any

partnerships you have already created.

Select the Visibility pick list and select

Visible or Temporary.

I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Iw^Nn^Gload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

After you finish the HotSync setup,

select Done to return to Applications

View.

Press Applications

HotSync

and select

You’re now ready to sync your Centro with

your Bluetooth computer.

Synchronizing over a Bluetooth

connection

When you synchronize using the Bluetooth

wireless feature on your Centro, you don’t

need your sync cable. This is especially

useful if you travel with a laptop enabled

with Bluetooth wireless technology.

10 Select Local.

11 Select the pick list below the HotSync

icon, and then select the name of the

PC you set up for Bluetooth

synchronization (see Setting up a

Bluetooth connection for

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify the following

on your computer:

•

It includes built-in Bluetooth wireless

technology or a Bluetooth adapter.

synchronization).

•

Bluetooth is turned on.

12 Select the HotSync

icon on your

HotSync manager is active. On a

Centro.

Windows computer, you know HotSync

manager is active when its icon appears

in the lower-right corner of your screen.

When synchronization is complete, a

message appears at the top of your Centro

screen. Be patient; synchronization may

take a few minutes.

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Synchronizing over an infrared

connection

When you synchronize using the IR port on

your Centro, you don’t need your sync

cable. This is especially useful if you travel

with an IR-enabled laptop.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify the following

on your computer:

•

It has an enabled IR port or an IR device

attached to it. Check your computer’s

documentation to see if it supports IR

communication.

On your Centro, press

Applications and select

HotSync

Select Local.

•

HotSync manager is active. On a

Select the pick list below the HotSync

icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.

Windows computer, you know HotSync

manager is active when its icon appears

in the lower-right corner of your screen.

Position the IR port on your Centro

within a few inches of your computer’s

IR port.

WINDOWS ONLY

On your computer, click HotSync

manager in the taskbar in the

Select the HotSync

Centro.

icon on your

lower-right corner of your screen. Make

sure that Infrared is selected.

When synchronization is complete, a

message appears at the top of your Centro

screen. Be patient; synchronization may

take a few minutes.

I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Iw^Nn^Gload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

MAC ONLY

Using expansion

cards

Double-click the HotSync manager

icon in the Palm folder.

Click the HotSync Controls tab, and

then select Enabled.

The expansion card slot on your Centro

enables you to add microSD cards to

extend the storage capacity of your Centro

(expansion cards sold separately). Here are

some examples of what microSD

expansion cards can store:

Click the Connection Settings tab, and

then check the On box next to IR port.

Close the HotSync Software Setup

window.

On your Centro, press

•

Photos

Applications

HotSync

and select

MP3 audio files

Email attachments

Games

Select Local.

Select the pick list below the HotSync

icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.

eBooks

Position the IR port on your Centro

within a few inches of your Mac’s IR

port.

Microsoft Office files

Adobe Acrobat files

Applications

Databases

Select the HotSync

icon on your

Centro.

When synchronization is complete, a

message appears at the top of your Centro

screen. Be patient; synchronization may

take a few minutes.

Inserting an expansion card

Remove the battery door.

Open the expansion slot door.

Hold your Centro with the screen facing

you, and hold the card with the label

U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

facing you. The notch on the card should

be in the lower corner.

Press the card into the expansion slot to

release it from the expansion slot.

After you feel the expansion card slot

eject the card, remove the card

from the slot.

Close the expansion slot door.

Replace the battery door.

Opening applications on an expansion

card

Insert the card into the expansion card

slot until you feel it lock into place.

After you insert an expansion card into the

expansion card slot, you can open any of

the applications stored on the expansion

card.

TIP The expansion card slot has a push-push

mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;

push in gently to remove it.

Insert the expansion card into the

expansion card slot. The Card category

of Applications View automatically

appears.

TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,

you hear a confirmation tone when you insert

or remove an expansion card.

Close the expansion slot door.

Replace the battery door.

Removing an expansion card

Remove the battery door.

Open the expansion slot door.

U S I N G

C A R D S

^{E X P}D^Ao^Nw^Sn^{I O}lo^Nad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Select the icon for the application you

want to open.

Copying applications between an

expansion card and your Centro

Press Center

to open the

You can copy applications from your Centro

to your expansion card and vice versa.

application.

TIP Install the Files application from the

Getting Started CD to easily browse and

manage files on an expansion card.

TIP Before you copy an application to an

expansion card, make sure that it is

compatible with Palm OS software version

5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work

with expansion cards and do not allow you to

store files in a location that is separate from

the application.

Accessing items stored on an expansion

card

When an expansion card contains items

such as pictures or songs, you can’t view

them directly from the Card category in

Applications View. You must open the app

that recognizes the item.

Press Applications

Insert the expansion card into the

expansion card slot. The Card category

of Applications View automatically

appears.

Select the category pick list in the title

bar, and select All.

Select the icon for the application in

which you want to open the item. For

example, to view a picture, select

Pics&Videos.

Press Menu

Select Copy from the App menu.

Select the Copy To pick list and select

the destination: Phone or <card

name>.

U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Select the From pick list and select the

location of the application you want to

copy: Phone or <card name>.

Renaming an expansion card

If you change the contents of an expansion

card, you may at some point want to

rename the card to better match its

contents.

Highlight the application you want to

copy.

Select Copy.

Insert the expansion card into the

expansion card slot.

Viewing expansion card information

Select the category pick list at the top

of the screen and select All.

Select Card Info

Press Menu

Select Rename Card from the Card

menu.

Enter a new name for the card.

Select OK.

The Card Info application displays general

information about the expansion card that

is currently in the expansion slot, and it

enables you to rename and format a card.

TIP If you have trouble copying info to,

renaming, or formatting an expansion card,

make sure the card is not write-protected.

Press Applications and select Card Info. If a

“This card is read-only” message appears, the

card is write-protected. See the instructions

that came with your card for additional info.

•

Press Applications

and select

Card Info

U S I N G

C A R D S

^{E X P}D^Ao^Nw^Sn^{I O}lo^Nad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

232

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

Formatting an expansion card

Insert the expansion card into the

expansion card slot.

Formatting an expansion card is similar to

formatting a disk on a computer. When

you format an expansion card, you erase all

the information stored on the card.

Select the category pick list at the top

of the screen and select All.

Select Card Info

Press Menu

TIP If you format a card, any photos or

Select Format Card from the Card

menu.

documents that were previously stored on the

card are deleted from your desktop software

the next time you sync. You can recover these

files from the backup folder, or you can

prevent the deletion by temporarily changing

your sync settings for the affected application

to Desktop overwrites handheld.

Enter a new name for the card.

Select OK.

U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

U S I N G

C A R D S

^{E X P}D^Ao^Nw^Sn^{I O}lo^Nad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

234

CHAPTER

Your personal settings

Customizing your Palm^®Centro^™smart device is a great way to

make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.

On your Centro, you can easily customize the sounds, fonts,

screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of

security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone

call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the

life of your Centro battery. There are lots of ways to make your

Centro work better for you.

Benefits

•

Access applications quickly

•

Conserve power

•

Make your screen easy to read

Enjoy your Centro more

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Locking your Centro and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Sliding the Ringer switch back to Sound On

restores the previous sound settings.

System sound

settings

Silencing sounds

You can immediately silence all alerts,

ringtones, music that plays through the

built-in speaker, and system sounds by

sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off. This

does not mute the audio during a phone

call.

Sound Off

Sound On

Setting system volume levels

Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off

. Your Centro vibrates once to let you

know that you’ve turned sounds off.

You can set the volume level for system

sounds, such as the tone that plays when

you synchronize.

To hear all sounds again, slide the

Ringer switch to Sound On

TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,

the ringer setting overrides the sound settings

and all sounds are turned off.

If you have set up Push to Talk, your PTT

availability status is affected by the Ringer

switch setting. When the Ringer switch is

set to Sound Off, your availability is set to

Silent.

Press Applications

Sounds

and select

NOTE For info on setting the vibrate

option, see the section on setting alert

tones in the chapters that describe the

individual applications.

Select the Application pick list and

select System.

S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Select the System Volume and Game

Volume pick lists and select the volume

levels.

Backlight

Press Left and Right to adjust the

brightness.

Select Done.

TIP To temporarily set the backlight to the

preset low setting, press Option + Menu.

TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set

the brightness duration during a call in Power

Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.

Select Done.

Changing the screen font

Display and

You can change the screen font in

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,

Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary

between applications, and some

appearance settings

Adjusting the brightness

applications may offer fewer choices.

Depending on the lighting conditions in

which you’re using your Centro, you may

need to adjust the brightness of the

screen.

Open the application in which you want

to change the font.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Font.

Press Option , and then press

Backlight

D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E

Download from Ww^Sw^E.S^To^Tm^{I N}a^Gn^Suals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

238

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Select a font style. (In the web browser,

select the Font size pick list and select

Large or Small.)

3 Set any of the following preferences:

Preset to: The standard number

conventions for your country. When you

select a country, the other Formats

Preferences are automatically set to

that country’s conventions. You can also

edit each option individually.

Small font

Large bold font

Large font

Small bold font

Select OK.

Setting display formats

Formats Preferences enable you to select

number conventions based on geographic

regions. For example, in the United

Kingdom, time often is expressed using a

24-hour clock. In the United States, time is

expressed using a 12-hour clock with an

AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in

applications on your Centro use the

Formats Preferences settings.

Time: The time format. Select HH:MM

to display a 24-hour clock.

Date: The date format.

Week starts: The first day of the week

(usually Sunday or Monday).

Numbers: The format for numbers with

decimal points and commas.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Formats.

and select

Select Done.

D I S P L A Y A N D

S E T T I N G S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search A^An^Pd^PD^Eo^Aw^Rn^Alo^Na^Cd^E.

239

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Aligning the screen to correct tapping

problems

Changing the system color scheme

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Color Theme.

and select

Occasionally, the Centro touchscreen

alignment may need to be readjusted. If

this problem occurs, you may see the

wrong feature being activated when you

tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can

align the screen at any time.

Select a color scheme from the list.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Touchscreen.

and select

Follow the onscreen instructions and

tap the screen where indicated.

Select Done.

TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the

Main tab in the Phone application (see

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone

application) and the background for Calendar

Agenda View (see Customizing display

options for your calendar).

Select Done.

D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E

Download from Ww^Sw^E.S^To^Tm^{I N}a^Gn^Suals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

240

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Applications settings

TIP To create a new category, select the

category pick list and select Edit Categories.

Select New, and then enter the category

name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and

then select OK.

You can change the Applications settings

on your Centro so that you can easily

access the applications you use most

often. You can arrange and display your

applications by category, reassign

DID YOU KNOW

If there is an expansion card in

the expansion slot, the card appears in the

category pick list and is treated as a category

when you press Applications repeatedly.

the buttons on your Centro, and select

default applications for specific tasks.

Displaying applications by category

Arranging applications by category

Do one of the following:

You can assign an application to a category

and then display a specific category of

applications in Applications View.

•

Press Applications

repeatedly to

cycle through the categories.

•

Select the category pick list at the top

of the screen and select a category.

Select All to display all your

applications.

Press Applications

Press Menu

Select Category on the App menu.

Select the pick list next to each

application and select a category.

Changing Applications View

By default, Applications View displays each

application as an icon. As an alternative,

you can view a list of applications. The list

view is particularly useful when you have

so many applications in a category that the

applications fill up more than one screen.

Select Done.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search ^AA^Pnd^{P L}D^Io^Cw^An^Tl^Io^Oa^Nd^S. ^{S E T T I N G S}

241

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Press Applications

Press Menu

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Buttons.

and select

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

Select the pick list next to the item you

want to reassign, and then select an

application.

Select the View By pick list and select

List.

Select OK.

Reassigning buttons

With Buttons Preferences, you can select

which applications are associated with the

quick buttons and the Side button on your

Centro. You can assign a primary and

secondary application to each of the three

quick buttons that open an application.

Select Done.

NOTE We recommend that you keep the

primary button assignments on the factory

settings until you become comfortable with

the features of your Centro. If you do

change the primary button assignments,

remember that the instructions in this

guide and in the other help features refer to

the original button settings.

DID YOU KNOW

You can also choose an

application to open with the sync button on

the USB sync cable. To change this setting,

select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences

screen.

TIP To restore all the buttons and key

combinations to their factory settings, select

Default.

A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S

242

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

DID YOU KNOW Some third-party applications

take over a button when you install the

application. For example, after you subscribe

to Push to Talk, the application permanently

takes over the Side button. If you cancel your

subscription to PTT, you must do a hard reset

to be able to reassign the Side button to

another application.

Changing default applications

Select Done.

Sometimes one application looks for

another application to handle information

(for example, a mail application might open

a browser when you select a link in an

email message). Your Centro comes with a

set of predefined applications to handle

email, messaging, and browser requests

from other applications. If you have more

than one application to handle these

requests on your Centro, you can specify

which application you want to use for each

function.

Locking your Centro

and info

Your Centro includes several features that

protect it from inadvertent use and keep

your information private. You can lock any

of the following features on your Centro:

Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the

Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard

and all buttons to prevent accidental

presses in your bag or pocket.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Default Apps.

and select

Screen: You can disable the screen’s

touch-sensitive feature during an active call

or call alert.

Select each pick list and select the

application you want to associate with

that function.

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O A N D I N F O

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search ^YA^Ond^{U R}Download.

243

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your

phone to require a password for making

calls. The built-in security software lets you

make emergency calls even if your phone

is locked.

Centro: You can set your Centro to require

a password for viewing any information on

your Centro.

Entries: You can mask or hide entries

marked as private and set your Centro to

require a password for viewing them.

You can change how quickly Keyguard turns

on, or you can disable this feature

altogether. To change the Keyguard

settings, do the following:

Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Keyguard.

and select

The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so

that you don’t accidentally press buttons or

activate items on the screen while your

Centro is in a pocket or bag.

Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and

then do one of the following:

By default, Keyguard turns on whenever

the screen is off. Each time you wake up

the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to

unlock the keyboard and use your Centro.

• Select how quickly you want Keyguard

to turn on: When power is turned

off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30

seconds after power off.

To turn off Keyguard, do the following:

• Select Disable to completely disable

When the screen is off, press Power/

End to wake up the screen.

Press Center to turn off Keyguard.

the Keyguard feature until you turn it

on again by pressing Option

Power/End when the screen is on.

Select Done.

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O

^YD^Oo^Uw^Rnload from ^AW^Nw^Dw^I.S^No^Fm^Oanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Locking your screen

Locking your phone (Phone Lock)

You can lock your SIM card to prevent

You can set your Centro to automatically

lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in unauthorized calls and use of other

certain situations.

wireless features. When your SIM card is

locked, you must enter the correct PIN

code to unlock it, even if you move it to a

different phone. You can still make

emergency calls when your phone is

locked, however.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Keyguard.

and select

Check any of the following boxes:

Incoming calls received: Disables the

screen when the phone rings. You must

IMPORTANT If your SIM card is locked

and you enter the wrong PIN more than

three times, you must call AT&T for your

unique PIN unlock key (PUK) to unlock your

SIM card.

use the 5-way

to select the

onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,

or press Send to answer the call or

Power/End to ignore the call.

On a call: Disables the screen after you

answer a call. You must use the

TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other

people can still see the info on your Centro,

but they cannot make or receive phone calls

or use the other wireless features without

your password.

5-way

to select the onscreen

buttons during the call. Use this setting

to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen

buttons while you’re holding your

Centro near your ear to speak.

Press Phone

Select Done.

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select Phone

Lock.

DID YOU KNOW When you check the boxes to

disable the touchscreen during a call, the

touchscreen is automatically enabled again

after you end the call.

Check the Lock SIM box.

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O A N D I N F O

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search ^YA^Ond^{U R}Download.

245

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

When prompted, enter the current PIN

and select OK. (Unless you changed

your PIN, enter the default PIN,

To disable the current Phone Lock settings:

Press Phone

Press Menu

provided with AT&T account materials.)

Select Options, and then select Phone

If you want to change the PIN, select

Change PIN, enter a new PIN, and then

select OK. Repeat this step to verify the

new PIN.

Lock.

Uncheck the Lock SIM box.

Enter your PIN code.

Select OK.

If your SIM card supports fixed number

dialing (FDN), select Advanced and

check the Enable Fixed Number

Dialing box to restrict dialing to the

numbers in your FDN list. When

prompted, enter your PIN2 and then

select OK.

Locking your Centro

To protect your personal information, you

can lock your Centro so that you need to

enter your password to access any of your

information or to use any of the features on

your Centro, including the phone. You can,

however, still make emergency calls when

your Centro is locked.

Turn your phone off to activate the

phone lock feature.

To turn your phone on again, press and

hold Power/End , enter your PIN, and

then select OK to unlock your Centro.

IMPORTANT If you lock your Centro, you

must enter the exact password to unlock it.

If you forget the password, you need to

perform a hard reset to resume using your

Centro. Performing a hard reset while your

Centro is password locked deletes all the

entries in your Centro and completely

reformats it. If you use password

TIP To manage your FDN list, press

Applications, select SIM Book, press Menu,

and then select Modify FDN from the

Options menu.

Your SIM card locks again when you turn

off your Centro and then turn it back on.

protection in Palm Desktop software, you

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O

^YD^Oo^Uw^Rnload from ^AW^Nw^Dw^I.S^No^Fm^Oanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

246

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

must remember your password to restore

your info. However, if you do not use

password protection in Palm Desktop

software, you can restore all previously

synchronized info the next time you sync

(see Synchronizing information—the

basics).

Press Applications

Security

Select the Password box.

and select

On power off: Locks your Centro when

you turn off the screen, or when it

shuts off with the Auto-off feature.

At a preset time: Locks your Centro at

a specific time of day.

After a preset delay: Locks your Centro

after a period of inactivity.

Select OK.

Do one of the following:

• Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your

Centro immediately.

Assign a password and a password hint.

Select the Auto Lock Device box.

• Press Applications

to accept

your settings and continue using your

Centro.

When prompted, enter your password

and select OK.

Select one of the following options:

Never: Prevents your Centro from

locking automatically.

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O A N D I N F O

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search ^YA^Ond^{U R}Download.

247

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

define a password, you must enter it to

display private entries. If you do not define

a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal

private entries without a password.

TIP After you create a password, you can lock

your system manually. Press Applications

and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,

and then select Off & Lock.

Open the entry that you want to mark

private.

TIP To change your password, select the

Password box, enter your current password,

and then enter the new password. To delete

your password, select the Password box and

then select Unassign.

Select Details.

Check the Private box.

Select OK.

Working with private entries

Hiding or masking all private entries

In most applications, you can mark

individual entries as private. All private

entries remain visible and accessible until

you select the Security setting. You have

three Security setting options:

Make sure the entries you want to mask or

hide are marked private.

Press Applications

Security

and select

Show Records: Private records are visible.

Select the Current Privacy pick list and

select either Hide Records or Mask

Records.

Hide Records: Private entries do not

appear anywhere in the application.

If prompted for your password, enter it

and then select OK.

Mask Records: Private entries are

replaced with a gray bar that lets you know

the entry is there but keeps it from being

legible.

Viewing all private records

You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden

or masked.

After you enable the mask or hide setting,

any entries marked as private are

immediately hidden or masked. If you

Press Applications

Security

and select

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O

^YD^Oo^Uw^Rnload from ^AW^Nw^Dw^I.S^No^Fm^Oanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

248

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Select the Current Privacy pick list and marked as private are deleted. You can

select Show Records.

restore your private entries the next time

you sync, and then create a new password.

If prompted for your password, enter it

and then select OK.

Follow these steps to recover from a lost

password:

Viewing private entries in a specific

application

Press Applications

Security

and select

Open the application that contains the

private entries you want to see.

Select the Password box.

Select Lost Password.

Select Ye s .

Press Menu

Select Options, and then select

Security.

TIP If you want additional security for

Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase

a third-party solution.

Select the Current Privacy pick list and

select Show Records.

Select OK.

If prompted for your password, enter it

Entering owner information

and then select OK.

You can use Owner Preferences to record

information that you want to associate with

your Centro, such as your name, company

name, and home phone number. If you lock

your Centro (see Locking your Centro), the

Owner Preferences information appears on

the screen that requests your password to

unlock it, and you must also enter your

password to change the Owner

Security Password and Palm Desktop

software (Windows)

You can set the Windows version of

Palm^®Desktop software to observe the

security password for your Centro. If you

forget your password, you cannot view

your information in Palm Desktop. If your

Centro is unlocked, you can change your

password on your Centro, but all entries

Preferences information.

L O C K I N G

C E N T R O A N D I N F O

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search ^YA^Ond^{U R}Download.

249

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Owner.

and select

network when your phone is on and you

are inside a coverage area. Date & Time

Preferences also enable you to manually

set the date, time, and location (time zone)

setting for your Centro.

If you assigned a password with the

Security application, select Unlock,

enter your password, and then select

OK to continue.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Date & Time.

and select

Enter the text that you want to appear in

the Owner Preferences screen.

Select the Automatically set pick list

and select one of the following settings:

NOTE The options that appear on the

screen vary based on the setting you select

in step 3.

Date, time and time zone: The date,

time, and time zone are acquired from

the AT&T network.

Date and time: Lets you set the time

zone manually. The date and time are

acquired from the AT&T network.

Select Done.

This setting is useful when you travel

from one time zone to another. You can

enter an appointment in your calendar

and set no time zone. When you get to

your destination time zone, the

System settings

Setting the date and time

By default, your Centro synchronizes the

date, time, and time zone with the AT&T

S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S

250

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

appointment appears on your calendar

at the correct local time.

Select Done.

TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar

events. See Creating an event.

Nothing: Lets you set the date, time,

and time zone manually. No info is

acquired from the AT&T network.

Optimizing power settings

Power Preferences enable you to adjust

settings to maximize the battery’s

performance.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select Power.

and select

Set any of the following preferences:

Brightness: Sets the intensity of the

screen backlight. Drag the slider or

press Left and Right to adjust the

brightness level.

If the Location pick list appears, select

it, and then select a city in your time

zone.

TIP If a city in the same time zone is not on

the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a

city in your time zone, and then select OK. If

necessary, modify any of the settings in the

Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.

If the Date and Time fields appear,

select the Date field and select the

date, and then select the Time field and

select the time.

S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

Auto-off after: Determines how long

Select Done.

your screen stays on during a period of

inactivity. When there is no interaction

with the keyboard or screen for the

specified time period, your Centro turns

off automatically.

TIP You can also access the brightness setting

by pressing Option + P. To temporarily set the

backlight to the preset low setting, press

Option + Menu.

Backlight during calls: To preserve

power during an active call, you can set

the screen backlight either to dim or

turn off after a specified amount of time.

Turning off the backlight saves more

power than dimming it. With the

backlight turned off, you can still see a

faint image on the screen and use any

of the buttons on the screen. To return

backlight brightness to normal, press

any key or tap the screen. Be careful;

pressing Power/End hangs up an active

call, and tapping an onscreen button

activates that command.

Connecting to a VPN

If you want to use your Centro to access

your corporate email account or other files

on your corporate server, you may need to

set up a virtual private network (VPN) on

your Centro. A VPN enables you to log in to

your corporate server through the

company’s firewall (security layer). You

need a VPN client on your Centro if your

Centro and your company’s server are

located on opposite sides of the firewall.

Beam Receive: Determines whether

your Centro is ready to receive

Check with your company’s system

administrator to see if a VPN is required for

accessing the corporate server. If a VPN is

required, you must purchase and install a

third-party VPN client on your Centro to

use this feature.

information over an infrared beam. If

you leave this option turned off, you

must return to this screen to turn on

this option the next time you want to

receive a beamed item.

C O N N E C T I N G T O

V P N

Downlo^Aad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

252

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

TIP For information about third-party VPN

client software, visit go.palm.com/centro-att/.

Install your third-party VPN client. See

Installing applications for details.

Press Applications

Prefs

Select VPN.

and select

Enter the settings provided by your

corporate system administrator.

C O N N E C T I N G T O

V P N

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

C O N N E C T I N G T O

V P N

Downlo^Aad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

254

CHAPTER

Common questions

Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,

this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly

asked questions. For additional information and answers to

other common questions, visit att.com/wirelesssupport.

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this chapter

Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Resetting your Centro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Phon e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 71

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Making room on your Centro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

•

Set data connection features, such as

activating or ending data connections

Upgrading

Provide web-clipping features, such as

PQA files

If you experience problems with your

Palm^®Centro^™smart device after

performing the upgrade steps in this guide,

you may have incompatible applications or

settings that were not quarantined during

the installation process. These

incompatible applications or settings can

lead to numerous issues, including system

resets and freezes. If you experience a

problem after upgrading, follow the steps

in this section to remove the incompatible

apps from your Centro and to transfer your

other info to your new Centro.

Provide instant messaging features

If you want to continue using these types

of applications, please contact the

third-party developer for software updates

and for info about compatibility with your

Centro.

WINDOWS ONLY

Use the following instructions to upgrade

your Centro on a Windows XP computer.

On your computer, click Start >

Programs > Palm > Safe HotSync.

NOTE If you have trouble installing a

third-party application, contact the

developer for assistance.

Follow the instructions on the screen.

Locate the Old_Apps folder on your

computer. This folder is usually located

inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

We recommend that you do not install

apps that do any of the following:

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

•

Modify phone functions, such as

ringtones, dialing, or caller ID

To help you identify the app that is

causing the problem, move one app at a

time from the Old_Apps folder to the

Backup folder, and then sync.

Replace organizer features, such as

Contacts or Calendar

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download^U. ^{P G R A D I N G}

257

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

If the problem recurs, delete the last

app you installed and report the

problem to its developer.

Confirm that your copy includes the

Backup subfolder and that all the files in

the original Backup subfolder are also in

the copy of the Backup subfolder.

Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in

the Old_Apps folder.

Delete all files from the original Backup

subfolder.

NOTE If you have trouble moving apps

from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup

folder, or determining which files to move,

try reinstalling the app using the original

third-party developer files.

Perform a hard reset on your Centro.

See Resetting your Centro for

instructions.

Sync your Centro with your new

desktop software and be sure to select

your existing device name from the

User list.

TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See

What is the backup folder?.

To help you identify the app that is

causing the problem, move one

third-party app from the copy of the

Backup subfolder to the original

Backup subfolder, and then sync.

MAC ONLY

Locate your user folder on your

computer.

If the problem recurs, delete the last

app you installed and report the

problem to its developer.

NOTE Your user folder name is the same

as your device name and is usually found in

this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party

apps in the copy of the Backup folder.

Select your user folder and Option-drag

it to your Mac desktop to make a copy

of that folder.

U P G R A D I N G

258

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Quit any active applications, including

virus scanners and Internet security

applications.

Desktop software

installation

Make sure you’re installing the software

from the Getting Started CD that came

with your new Centro. Other versions of

the desktop software may not work

with your Centro.

If you are having trouble installing the

desktop software, you may have the wrong

version of the software or some of your

computer’s resources may be unavailable.

Insert the Getting Started CD to restart

the installation.

TIP The Getting Started CD installs software

that lets you synchronize using Palm^®Desktop

software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If

you want to synchronize using a different

personal information manager (PIM), you

must install a third-party solution. Contact the

PIM’s author or vendor to learn if software

is available for your Centro.

IMPORTANT Always use the same

language for your Centro, your computer

operating system, and your desktop

software. Otherwise, you may lose

information or have difficulty with

synchronization. Support is not provided for

mismatched language setups.

Follow these steps to retry the installation.

Make sure your computer profile

includes administrator rights to install

software. In large organizations, these

are usually granted by the system

administrator.

Resetting your

Centro

Performing a soft reset

Restart your computer.

Performing a soft reset is similar to

restarting a computer. If your Centro is not

responding or you have trouble

D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N

259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

synchronizing with your computer, a soft

reset may help. All your info is retained

when you perform a soft reset.

Don’t know how? See Replacing the

battery.

When the Palm logo appears, press and

Remove the battery from your Centro,

and then reinsert it.

hold Up

until the black status bar at

the bottom of the screen fills and

disappears, and then release Up

Don’t know how? See Replacing the

battery.

Delete the third-party application that

you suspect is causing the problem.

NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert

the battery.

Perform a soft reset. The wireless

features of your Centro are not available

until you complete this step.

At the end of the soft reset, Date &

Time Preferences appears. Select

Done.

Performing a hard reset

A hard reset erases all information and

third-party software on your Centro. Never

perform a hard reset without first trying a

soft reset and a system reset and trying to

resolve third-party software issues. (See

Third-party applications for suggestions on

diagnosing third-party software issues.)

After a hard reset, you can restore

Performing a system reset

A system reset, also called a safe or warm

reset, tells your Centro to stop what it’s

doing and start over again without loading

any system extras. If your Centro loops or

freezes during or after a soft reset, a

system reset may help. Performing a

system reset can release your Centro from

an endless loop so that you can uninstall a

third-party application that may be causing

the looping.

previously synchronized information the

next time you sync.

IMPORTANT If you set a password on

your Centro, performing a hard reset

reformats your Centro. This is a more

severe form of a hard reset, which

Remove the battery from your Centro,

and then reinsert it.

Y O U R C E N T R O

^{R E S E T T I N G}Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

260

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

removes all your information, and restores

your formats, preferences, and other

settings to the factory default settings.

your Centro until the process is complete.

This may take up to 10 minutes.

When the language selection screen

appears, select the same language you

selected for your desktop software.

TIP Some third-party applications do not

create a backup on your computer when you

synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you

may lose data in these applications and you

will need to reinstall the application after the

hard reset. Please contact the application’s

developer to find out which data is backed up

during synchronization.

IMPORTANT Always use the same

language for your Centro, your computer

operating system, and your desktop

software. Otherwise, you may lose

information or have difficulty with

synchronization. Support is not provided for

mismatched language setups.

Remove the battery from your Centro,

and then reinsert it.

(Optional) If you want to confirm that

the hard reset was successful,

immediately afterward, press

Don’t know how? See Replacing the

battery.

Applications

HotSync

appears in the upper-right corner, the

and select

. If your device name

When the Palm logo appears, press and

hold Power/End until the black

status bar at the bottom of the screen

fills and disappears, and then release

hard reset was not successful.

Power/End

When the Erase all data? prompt

Replacing the battery

appears, press Up

to confirm the

hard reset.

Your Centro comes with a replaceable

battery. Be sure to use a replacement

IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in

progress message appears, do not touch

T H E B A T T E R Y

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search^RA^En^Pd^LD^Ao^Cw^{I N}n^Gload.

261

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

battery that is recommended or sold by

Palm and is compatible with the Centro.

Align the metal contacts on the new

battery with the contacts inside the

battery compartment, insert the new

battery into the compartment at a

45-degree angle, and then press it into

place.

CAUTION Failure to use the proper battery

may result in a risk of personal injury or

product damage, and it voids your Centro

warranty.

Battery contacts

Press Power/End to turn off the

screen.

Centro

contacts

Press the Battery door near the top

where the door and camera sections

meet and slide it downward to remove

it from your Centro.

Battery door

IMPORTANT Use the battery that came

with your Centro. Do not use a battery

from another Centro model in your Centro.

Similarly, do not use the Centro battery in

another Centro model. Using a battery that

is designed for another Centro model can

damage your Centro.

Place a finger in the notch next to the

battery, and lift up the old battery at a

45-degree angle to remove it from the

compartment.

Slide the battery door onto the back of

the Centro until it clicks into place.

R E P L A C I N G

B A T T E R Y

D^To^Hw^Enload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

262

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Connect your Centro to the charger or

sync cable to charge the new battery.

Look closely at the screen. If you can

see a dim image, try adjusting the

screen brightness (see Adjusting the

brightness).

TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery

properly. In some areas, disposal in household

or business trash is prohibited.

If the screen is still blank, perform a soft

reset (see Performing a soft reset).

If the problem persists, connect your

Centro to the charger (see Charging the

battery) and perform a soft reset again.

Screen

If that doesn’t work, perform a hard

reset (see Performing a hard reset).

The screen appears blank

When a call lasts longer than the limit

specified in Power Preferences, the

screen dims automatically. In certain

lighting conditions, the screen may

appear blank when this occurs.

TIP To find carrying cases that protect the

screen, and other useful accessories, visit

go.palm.com/centro-att/.

Press any key except Power/End to

restore the screen to normal brightness.

Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.

The screen backlight may also be set to

dim or turn off after a specified amount

of time (see Optimizing power settings).

The screen doesn’t respond accurately to

taps or it activates wrong features

Press Applications

Use the 5-way

to select Prefs

to select

Use the 5-way

Touchscreen.

When a period of inactivity lasts longer

than the limit specified in Power

Preferences, the screen turns off. Press

Follow the onscreen instructions to

align the screen.

and release Power/End

to wake up

Select Done.

the screen.

S C R E E N

263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

If the problem persists, check for dirt

between the screen and the edge of the hard reset or otherwise need to erase all

Centro.

vice versa. If you ever need to perform a

your information on your Centro, you can

synchronize your Centro with your

computer to restore the info. Similarly, if

your computer crashes and your Palm

Desktop info is damaged, you can recover

your info by synchronizing with your

Centro. To make sure you always have an

up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize

frequently.

If you’re using a screen protector, make

sure that it is properly installed.

There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left

corner

The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of

the screen is the Alert icon. It appears

when you have alarms or messages that

you haven’t acknowledged.

This section describes synchronization

between your Centro and a desktop

computer running Palm Desktop software.

You can also synchronize the information

on your Centro using third-party

Press and hold Center

or tap the

blinking bell with your stylus.

When the list of pending alerts appears,

do either of the following:

applications. See the documentation for

• Select the text of the alert to view the the third-party application for information

item. The item stays in the list.

on features and configuration.

• Check the box next to an alert to clear

it from the list, and then select Done.

Before you attempt to synchronize, make

sure you’ve installed the desktop

synchronization software from the Getting

Started CD.

Synchronization

TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never

synchronize more than one device to the

same device name on your computer.

Synchronization backs up the information

from your Centro onto your computer and

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Aw^Tn^Il^Ooa^Nd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

264

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

I can’t find my user folder

into the Backup folder.) The next time you

sync, the HotSync manager compares the

contents of the Backup folder to the

contents of your Centro, and then restores

any missing info or applications.

Windows: If your device name is one

word, your user folder name is the first six

characters of your device name. If your

device name is two words, your user folder

name consists of the first six characters of

the second word of your device name,

followed by the first letter of the first word.

For example, if your device name is John

Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.

Your user folder is usually located inside

one of the following folders:

If an app that you deleted reappears on

your Centro, try deleting the app from your

Backup folder.

Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync

attempt

Make sure that the USB sync cable is

securely connected to the USB port on

your computer and on the bottom of

your Centro (see Synchronizing

information—the basics).

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

Mac: Your user folder name is the same as

your device name and is usually found in

this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync

using an IR or Bluetooth^®wireless technology

connection, try using the USB sync cable

instead. If this solves the problem, check your

IR or Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing

information—advanced).

What is the backup folder?

The Backup folder is located inside your

user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).

During synchronization, the HotSync^®

manager puts a copy of most of your info

and applications into the Backup folder.

(Some third-party apps do not put a copy

Make sure that the HotSync manager is

running:

Windows: Right-click HotSync

manager

in the taskbar in the

S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N

265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

lower-right corner of your computer

If problems persist and you’re

synchronizing through a USB hub, try

connecting the sync cable to a different

USB port or directly to your computer’s

built-in USB port.

screen, and make sure that Local USB

is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync

manager icon, click Start, select

Programs, select Palm, and then select

HotSync manager.

Synchronize. If the synchronization is

successful, you do not need to

complete the remaining steps.

Check the multi-connector on the

bottom of your Centro for debris or

discoloration. Carefully clean the

connector by dipping a cotton swab in

some rubbing alcohol and gently wiping

the metal contacts on the connector.

Try to sync again.

Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac

hard drive. Double-click the HotSync

manager

icon in the Palm folder. In

the Connection Settings panel, set the

Local Setup port to Palm USB.

Check the connector on the USB sync

cable for integrity and cleanliness. Make

sure the pins on the connector are

straight, protruding, and not damaged. If

the cable appears to be damaged, stop

here and locate another USB sync

cable.

Synchronize. If the synchronization is

successful, you do not need to

complete the remaining steps.

Perform a soft reset (see Performing a

soft reset).

Synchronize. If the synchronization is

successful, you do not need to

complete the remaining steps.

10 WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall

Palm Desktop software. Click Start,

select Settings, select Control Panel,

select Add or Remove Programs,

select Palm Desktop software, and

then click Change/Remove.

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Aw^Tn^Il^Ooa^Nd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

266

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

NOTE Mac computers do not provide an

option for uninstalling Palm Desktop

software. Contact Support if the problem

persists after you complete step 7.

Locate your Backup subfolder and

rename the folder (for example,

BackupOld).

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>

11 Restart your computer.

Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications

: Palm : Users : <device name>

12 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from

the Getting Started CD that came with

your Centro.

NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info,

see I can’t find my user folder.

Synchronization starts but stops without

finishing

TIP The HotSync Log can give you information

about your most recent synchronization.

Synchronize.

If the problem is resolved, begin

reinstalling your third-party applications

one at a time by double-clicking a single

file in the original Backup subfolder that

you renamed, and sync after each

application you install. If the problem

recurs, delete the last application you

installed and report the problem to its

developer.

Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager

icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of

your computer screen, and then select View

Log.

Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the

HotSync menu, select View Log.

If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS^®

device or received a system error, such as

Sys0505, there may be conflicts with

software on your Centro.

WINDOWS ONLY If the Windows New

Hardware Wizard appears, the

synchronization process may be timing

out before the wizard completes its job.

S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N

267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Follow all instructions in the New

Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.

Getting Started CD and select Change

your synchronization method if

necessary. If you use a different PIM,

you need to install third-party software

to synchronize. For more information,

consult the company that makes the

PIM.

WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall

Palm Desktop software. Click Start,

select Settings, select Control Panel,

select Add or Remove Programs,

select Palm Desktop software, and

then click Change/Remove.

If multiple Palm OS devices are

synchronizing with your computer,

make sure the name of the device you

are synchronizing appears in the User

field on the toolbar of Palm Desktop

software.

NOTE Mac computers do not provide an

option for uninstalling Palm Desktop

software. Contact Technical Support if the

problem persists after you complete

step 3.

Open HotSync manager on your

computer, and make sure the necessary

conduits are set to Synchronize the

files.

Restart your computer.

Reinstall Palm Desktop software from

the Getting Started CD that came with

your Centro.

TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,

right-click the HotSync manager icon in the

taskbar, select Custom, select an app with

Outlook in its name, and then select Help.

Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t

appear where it should

Make sure you’re synchronizing with

the intended desktop personal

NOTE If you need to change the setting to

Synchronize the files, be sure to check

the Set as default box as well.

information manager (PIM). The Getting

Started CD enables you to choose

whether you want to synchronize with

Palm Desktop software or Microsoft

Outlook for Windows. Reinsert the

WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall

Palm Desktop software. Click Start,

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Aw^Tn^Il^Ooa^Nd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

268

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

select Settings, select Control Panel,

select Add or Remove Programs,

select Palm Desktop software, and

then click Change/Remove.

I have duplicate entries in Microsoft

Outlook after I sync

Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the

duplicate entries.

MAC ONLY Mac computers do not

provide an option for uninstalling Palm

Desktop software. Contact Support if

the problem persists after you complete

step 3.

On your computer, go to the application

with duplicate entries and manually

enter any info you added to your Centro

since the last time you synchronized.

Right-click HotSync manager

in the

Restart your computer.

taskbar and select Custom.

Reinstall Palm Desktop software from

the Getting Started CD that came with

your Centro.

Select an application that has duplicate

entries and also has Outlook in its

name.

(Outlook only) If you’re trying to

synchronize offline, set your Outlook

Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to

be available offline.

Click Change.

Select Desktop overwrites handheld,

and then click OK.

If more than one application has

duplicate entries, repeat steps 4

through 6 for each application with

duplicates.

TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are

not accessible with the included software. You

may want to use a third-party solution instead.

Click Done.

TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your

info with a global Exchange Address Book,

you must copy the addresses to your local

Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the

addresses and select Add to Personal

Address Book).

Synchronize your Centro and your

computer.

S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N

269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

My appointments show up in the wrong

time slot after I sync

Click Change.

Select Desktop overwrites handheld,

If you create an appointment in the wrong

time zone (that is, your desktop was set to

the wrong time zone), it shows up in the

wrong time zone on your Centro. To be

safe, enable local network time and avoid

assigning time zones to your

and then click OK.

Synchronize your Centro and your

computer.

Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog

box again.

appointments.

10 Make sure Synchronize the files is

selected and Set as default is checked,

and then click OK.

If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:

Make sure that you installed the

Microsoft Outlook conduit that came

with your Centro. If you’re not sure

whether this software is installed,

reinstall Palm Desktop software from

the Getting Started CD that came with

your Centro.

You should now be able to assign time

zones to your events without encountering

this problem.

If you’re using Palm Desktop software:

On your Centro, press Calendar

Press Menu

Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the

wrong entries.

Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your Centro

since the last time you synchronized.

Uncheck the New events use time

zones box (if it’s checked).

Click HotSync manager

taskbar and select Custom.

in the

On your computer, open Palm Desktop

software and correct the wrong entries.

Select an application that has both

Calendar and Outlook in its name.

^{S Y N C H R O N}D^{I Z}o^Aw^Tn^Il^Ooa^Nd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

270

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your Centro

since the last time you synchronized.

The text of my memos is truncated after I

sync

If you use your desktop software to create

a memo that is longer than 4,096

characters, the excess characters are

truncated when you transfer the memo to

your Centro.

Click HotSync manager

in the

taskbar and select Custom.

Select Calendar.

Click Change.

10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,

and then click OK.

Phone

11 Synchronize your Centro and your

computer.

Signal strength is weak

12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog

box again.

Become familiar with low coverage areas

where you live, commute, work, and play.

Then you will know when to expect signal

strength issues. You can check signal

strength by looking at the Signal Strength

icon in the title bar of the Main tab in

the Phone application. The stronger the

signal, the more bars that appear. If you are

outside a coverage area, no bars appear.

13 Make sure Synchronize the files is

selected and Set as default is checked,

and then click OK.

You should now be able to assign time

zones to your events without

encountering this problem.

IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the

future, do not assign time zones to your

events. Palm Desktop software does not

support time zones.

If you’re standing, move about ten feet

in any direction.

If you’re in a building, move near a

window. Open any metal blinds.

If you’re in a building, move outdoors or

to a more open area.

P H O N E

271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

If you’re outdoors, move away from

large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.

the microphone hole, which is on the

bottom right side of the Centro.

If you’re in a vehicle, move your Centro

so that it’s close to a window of your

vehicle.

•

If you’re using the speakerphone

feature with your Centro lying on a flat

surface, try turning the Centro face

down (screen facing the surface).

My Centro won’t connect to the mobile

network

I hear my own voice echo

Try the suggestions about signal

strength described in Signal strength is

weak.

Ask the person on the other end of the call

to turn down the volume on his or her

phone or to hold the phone closer to his or

her ear.

Turn off your phone and turn it on again

(see T u rning your phone on and off).

My voice is too quiet on the other end

Remove the SIM card (this causes a soft

reset) and reinsert it (see Inserting the

SIM card and battery).

•

Be sure to place the bottom of the

Centro, or the hands-free microphone,

close to your mouth.

The other person hears an echo

•

Check the Signal Strength

icon in

the title bar of the Main tab in the

Phone application. If the signal is weak

(few bars are displayed), try the

suggestions about signal strength

described in Signal strength is weak.

•

Try decreasing the volume on your

Centro to avoid coupling or feedback on

the other person’s end. This applies to

both the speakerphone and the

earpiece.

•

Position the earpiece closer to your ear

to prevent sound leaking back to the

microphone. Keep your hand away from

I hear static or interference

Check the Signal Strength

title bar of the Main tab in the Phone

icon in the

application. If the signal is weak (few bars

P H O N E

272

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

are displayed), try the suggestions about

My Centro makes or answers calls when

signal strength described in Signal strength it’s in a bag or pocket

is weak.

Items in your bag or pocket may be

If you’re using a Bluetooth^®hands-free

device, see I hear static or interference

when using my Bluetooth

pressing the onscreen Answer button or

otherwise activating screen items. If this

happens, be sure to press Power/End

to turn off the screen before placing your

Centro in a bag or pocket. You may also

want to disable the screen’s

hands-free device.

My phone seems to turn off by itself

touch-sensitive feature during incoming

calls (see Locking your screen).

If a system error and reset occur, the

Centro automatically turns the phone on if

it was on before the reset. However, if the

Centro can’t determine if your phone was

on before the reset, the phone does not

automatically turn on (see T u rning your

phone on and off). If the problem persists

and you’re using third-party applications,

see Third-party applications for additional

suggestions.

TIP To find carrying cases that can help

prevent your Centro from making calls, as well

as other useful accessories, visit att.com/

wirelessaccessories or visit your local AT&T

store.

Hands-free devices

TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in

optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by

physical obstacles, radio interference from

nearby electronic equipment, and other

factors.

H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

I can’t make or receive calls using a

Bluetooth^®hands-free device

I hear static or interference when using

my Bluetooth hands-free device

Confirm all the following:

•

Try moving your Centro closer to the

hands-free device. Audio quality

degrades as the distance between your

Centro and hands-free device increases.

The effective range for a device varies

between manufacturers.

•

The Bluetooth device is compatible with

your Centro. Go to go.palm.com/

centro-att/ for a list of compatible

devices.

•

Press Applications

Bluetooth . Make sure the

Bluetooth setting is set to On.

and select

•

Confirm that no obstructions, including

your body, are between your Centro and

your hands-free device.

You have already formed a partnership

between your Centro and your

hands-free device, and the hands-free

device appears in the Trusted Devices

list. (See Connecting to a Bluetooth^®

hands-free device.)

If the problem persists, turn the

Bluetooth setting to Off and then turn it

back on again. If it still persists, create a

new partnership with the hands-free

device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth^®

hands-free device).

•

Your hands-free device is charged and

turned on.

TIP For best performance, keep your

Bluetooth hands-free device and your phone

on the same side of your body.

Your Centro is within range of the

hands-free device.

If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth

setting to Off and then turn it on again. If it

still persists, delete the partnership, and

then create a new partnership with the

hands-free device (see Connecting to a

Bluetooth^®hands-free device).

Some features of my Bluetooth

hands-free device don’t work with my

Centro

•

Check the Palm compatibility list at

go.palm.com/centro-att/ to ensure that

your device is compatible.

H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S

274

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

•

Check the documentation that came

with your device or the manufacturer’s

website for information specific to

your device.

your location. AT&T should be able to

tell you if text messaging services have

been experiencing transmission delays.

Delays can also occur between the time

that a message is sent and the time it is

received.

•

Verify with the recipient that the

receiving device can handle text

messages.

•

For troubleshooting info on Xpress Mail,

If a text message arrives but does not

display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

go to xpressmail.att.com/subscriber.

•

For troubleshooting info on the

VersaMail application, see the User

Guide for the VersaMail Application on

the Palm Software Installation CD.

I can’t send or receive multimedia

messages

•

Make sure your phone is turned on (see

T u rning your phone on and off).

Messaging

•

Contact AT&T to verify that your plan

includes multimedia messaging

services (MMS), that these services

have been correctly activated, and that

they are available at your location. AT&T

should be able to tell you if multimedia

messaging services have been

I can’t send or receive text messages

•

Make sure your SIM card is inserted

correctly (see Inserting the SIM card

and battery) and your phone is turned on

(see T u rning your phone on and off).

experiencing transmission delays.

Delays can also occur between the time

that a message is sent and the time it is

received.

•

Contact AT&T to verify that your plan

includes text messaging services, that

these services have been correctly

activated, and that they are available at

E M A I L

275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

•

Make sure that either of the following

icons appears in the title bar of the Main

tab: . If you do not see either of

these icons, data services are not

available in your current location and you

cannot exchange multimedia messages.

My Centro won’t connect to the Internet

Your Centro supports GPRS and EDGE

wireless data networks. To connect to the

Internet, you must subscribe to and

activate data services with AT&T, and you

must be in a location with data coverage.

•

Verify with the recipient that the

receiving device can handle multimedia

messages.

Press and hold Power/End to turn off

your phone. Then press and hold the

same button to turn it back on again.

If a message arrives but does not

display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

Press Phone

of the following icons in the title bar of

the Main tab:

and look for either

If you see these icons, you are in a data

coverage area. Try connecting to the

Internet again. If you do not see either

of these icons, press

Web

Applications

, select Prefs

I can’t tell if data services are available

and continue with the following steps.

When your phone is on, icons appear in the

title bar in the Main tab in the Phone

application to indicate whether data

Select Network.

Select the Service pick list and select

services are available and whether a data

connection is active. Make sure that either

of the following icons appears in the title

MEdia Net.

Select Connect.

If the connection is successful, go to

the web browser. If you still can’t make

a connection, perform a soft reset (see

Performing a soft reset).

bar of the Main tab:

. If you do not

see either of these icons, data services are

not available in your current location and

you cannot connect to the Internet.

W E B

276

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

If your phone did not turn on

automatically after the soft reset, press

and hold Power/End to turn on your

phone, and try connecting to the

Internet.

include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,

WMLScript, and other plug-ins.

Some websites use a redirector to their

true home page. If the web browser on

your Centro can’t follow the redirector, try

using a desktop browser to see the landing

page of the redirector, and then enter that

address in the web browser on your

Centro.

Contact AT&T to verify the following:

• Your subscription plan includes

high-speed data services.

• Data services have been activated on

your account.

TIP Your Centro can open your email

application when you select an email address

on a web page. If nothing happens when you

select the link, make sure your email

application is already set up.

• Data coverage is available in your

location.

• There are no data service outages in

your location.

I can’t access a web page

It takes a long time for a web page to load

First, make sure you have Internet access:

Open the web browser and try to view

another web page you’ve loaded before. To

ensure you’re viewing the page directly

If it is taking longer than usual to load web

pages, you may have traveled from an

EDGE service area to a GPRS service area.

Although GPRS data service is considered

a high-speed data service, it seems slow if

you are used to EDGE speed.

from the Internet, press Menu

, select

Go, and then select Refresh.

If you can view the other web page after

you refresh it but you still can’t access the

page you were originally trying to view, the

page may contain elements that are not

supported by the web browser. These

Press Phone

of the following icons in the title bar of

the Main tab to confirm that you have a

and look for either

data connection:

WE B

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Try opening a different web page to see You may also be able to save the image on

if the problem persists.

your Centro or an expansion card and then

view the image later on your computer.

• If you can open a different web page,

it is likely that the original website is

experiencing problems, and the

A secure site refuses to permit a

transaction

problem is not related to your Centro.

Some websites don’t support certain

browsers for transactions. Please contact

the site’s webmaster to make sure the site

allows transactions using Blazer™ web

browser from your Centro.

• If the problem persists on a different

web page, you may have a problem

with your connection to the AT&T

network.

To be sure there is not a problem with

your connection to the AT&T network,

press and hold Power/End to turn off

your phone. Then press and hold the

same button to turn it back on again.

My Bluetooth DUN connection isn’t

working

Check all of the following:

Try opening the web page again to see

if it loads faster.

•

Press Applications

and select

Bluetooth . Make sure the

Bluetooth setting is set to On.

An image or map is too small on

my screen

•

You have already formed a partnership

between your Centro and your

computer (see Creating a partnership

between your Centro and your

computer).

The web browser has two modes:

Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized

Mode resizes all images and page

elements to fit into a single column on the

Centro screen. Switch to Wide Page Mode

to see the full-size image (see Viewing a

web page).

•

The Bluetooth feature on your computer

is turned on.

Your Centro is within 30 feet of your

computer.

W E B

278

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Camera

TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in

optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by

physical obstacles, radio interference from

nearby electronic equipment, and other

factors.

Here are some tips for taking good pictures

with the built-in camera:

•

Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,

lint-free cloth.

If the problem persists, try the following:

•

Take pictures in bright lighting

conditions. Low-light images may be

grainy, due to the sensitivity of the

camera.

•

Turn the Bluetooth setting to Off and

then turn it back on again.

•

Try moving your Centro closer to your

computer. The effective range for a

computer varies between

•

Hold the Centro as still as possible. Try

supporting your picture-taking arm

against your body or a stationary object

(such as a wall).

manufacturers.

•

Confirm that no obstructions, including

your body, are between your Centro and

your computer.

•

Keep the subject of the picture still.

Exposure time is longer with lower light

levels, so you may see a blur.

If the problem persists, create a new

partnership with your computer (see

Creating a partnership between your

Centro and your computer).

For best results, verify that you have the

brightest light source coming from

behind you, lighting the subject’s face.

Avoid taking indoor pictures with the

subject in front of a window or light.

•

Make sure the subject is at least 18

inches away from the camera to ensure

good focus.

C A M E R A

279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Remember that when you synchronize

your Centro with your computer, your

camera images are stored in the My

Pictures/Palm Photos folder on your hard

drive (see Viewing pictures and videos on

your computer).

memory on your Centro. Delete

messages with large attachments. If

you have hundreds of messages with or

without attachments, you may want to

delete older messages to make room

(see the User Guide for the VersaMail

Application on the Palm Software

Installation CD or the Xpress Mail

documentation at

Making room on your

Centro

xpressmail.att.com/subscriber).

•

Pictures & Videos: Large images take

up a lot of memory. Move images to an

expansion card or synchronize them to

your computer, and then delete the

images from your Centro (see Viewing

pictures and videos on your computer).

Keep in mind that your Centro includes an

expansion card slot, and that you can store

applications and information on expansion

cards (sold separately). However, you still

need free memory on the Centro itself to

run applications from an expansion card.

For more info on using expansion cards,

see Using expansion cards.

•

Music: Music files often consume a lot

of memory. Move music files to an

expansion card, or delete large files

from your Centro.

Messaging: Multimedia content can

also consume a lot of memory. Move

multimedia content to an expansion

card, or delete large files from your

Centro (see Deleting messages).

If you store a large number of records or

install many third-party applications, the

internal memory on your Centro may fill up.

Here are some common ways to clear

space:

•

Internet: If you set a large web browser

cache, you may want to use the web

browser’s advanced Memory

•

Email: Messages that have large

attachments can quickly consume

M A K I N G R O O M

Y O U R C E N T R O

Down^Olo^Nad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

280

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Management settings to clear all recent

pages (see Customizing your web

browser settings).

Perform a soft reset (see Performing a

soft reset).

If the problem persists, perform a

system reset (see Performing a system

reset).

•

Third-party applications: You can

delete infrequently used applications

(see Removing applications) or move

them to an expansion card (see Copying

applications between an expansion card

and your Centro).

Delete the most recently installed

application from your Centro (see

Removing applications).

If the problem persists, perform another

system reset.

If possible, synchronize your Centro

with your computer to back up your

most recent info.

Third-party

applications

If you’re unable to perform the

preceding steps or the problem

persists, locate your Backup subfolder

on your computer and rename the

folder (for example, BackupOld).

Some third-party applications can cause

conflicts on your Centro. For example,

third-party applications that were not

written with the Centro keyboard and

5-way navigator in mind may cause strange

behavior or errors when using the keyboard

and 5-way navigator in these applications.

Third-party applications that modify

wireless features may require extra

troubleshooting.

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>

Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications

: Palm : Users : <device name>

NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info,

see I can’t find my user folder.

If you recently installed an application and

your device seems to be stuck, try the

following:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Sea^Trc^Hh^{I R}A^Dn^-d^PD^Ao^Rw^Tn^Ylo^Aa^Pd^P.^{L I C A T I O N S}

281

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

Perform a hard reset (see Performing a

hard reset).

Error messages

Sync to restore your info in Calendar,

Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pictures

& Videos.

Your Centro is designed to minimize

interruptions when a system error occurs.

If your Centro encounters a system error, it

automatically resets itself and resumes

functioning as normal. If possible, it even

turns the phone back on if it was on before

the error occurred.

If the problem is resolved, begin

reinstalling your third-party applications

one at a time by double-clicking a single

file in the original Backup subfolder that

you renamed, and sync after each

application you install.

Sometimes you might want to know more

about an error. Your Centro uses a special

interface to show error messages in

greater detail.

10 If the problem recurs, delete the last

application you installed and report the

problem to its developer.

Press Phone

I can’t exit a game or third-party

application

Enter #*377, and then press Send

Review the screen with details about

the conditions that led up to the most

recent automatic reset.

Press Option

+ Applications

return to Applications View.

Select OK.

Getting more help

Contact the author or vendor of the

third-party software if you require further

assistance.

E R R O R M E S S A G E S

282

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

NOTE Third-party developers create their

own error messages. If you do not

understand an error message, please

contact the developer of the application for

help.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Do^Ew^Rn^Rlo^Oa^Rd.^{M E S S A G E S}

283

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

E R R O R M E S S A G E S

284

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

they can exchange information over short

distances. For more info, visit

www.bluetooth.com.

Terms

Alt (alternative)

CSD (circuit-switched data)

A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the

A dial-up Internet connection. You pay for

the connection time, not for how much

information you transfer. Contrast with

GPRS.

keyboard, and then press Alt

variations such as international characters

and symbols.

to access

Applications View

Device name

The screen on your Palm^®Centro^™smart

device from which you can open all

applications.

The name associated with your Centro and

with the info in your desktop software. The

device name (sometimes called the

username) distinguishes your Centro from

all other Palm OS devices. When you first

Auto-off interval

The time of inactivity that passes before

the screen on your Centro turns off. The

wireless features on your Centro are

unaffected by this setting.

synchronize your Centro, you are asked to

give it a device name. This name appears in

the User list in Palm Desktop software.

Every Palm OS device that is synchronized

with the same computer must have a

unique device name.

Beam

The process of sending or receiving an

entry or application using the infrared (IR)

port on your Centro.

Bluetooth^®wireless technology

Dialog box

A set of options and command buttons that

is enclosed by a border and that enables

you to carry out a specific task.

Technology that enables devices such as

the Centro, mobile phones, and computers

to connect wirelessly to each other so that

T E R M S

285

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM

Evolution)

Infrared (IR)

A way of transmitting information using

An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers light waves; this is called beaming. The IR

data speeds that are up to three times

faster than standard GPRS connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

port on your Centro enables you to transfer

information to other IR devices within a

short radius.

Favorite

Lithium ion (Li-ion)

A button that provides quick access to a

phone number (speed-dial button) or

commonly used application (such as Web

or Messaging). You can define an unlimited

number of favorite buttons in the Phone

application.

The rechargeable battery technology used

in the Centro.

MMS

An enhanced form of messaging that

enables you to send pictures, videos,

animations, sounds, and ringtones almost

instantly.

GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)

A mobile Internet connectivity technology

that allows persistent data connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

Option key

The keyboard key that enables you to

access the alternative feature that is

indicated above the letter on each key.

HotSync

The technology that synchronizes your

Centro and your computer with the simple

press of a button.

Palm^®Desktop software

A PIM application for computers that helps

you manage your personal information and

keep your personal information

HotSync manager

The computer application that manages the synchronized with your Centro.

synchronization of your Centro with your

computer.

T E R M S

286

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Palm™ Install Tool

PIM (personal information manager)

The component on your Windows

computer that enables you to install Palm

OS applications and other information on

your Centro.

A genre of software that includes

applications such as Palm Desktop

software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes,

and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,

schedules, tasks, and memos.

Palm^®OS by ACCESS

PIN (personal identification number)

The operating system of your Centro. Palm

OS is known for its simplicity of use and for The four-digit password assigned to your

the large number of compatible third-party

applications that can be added to your

Centro.

SIM card by AT&T. Turning on the PIN lock

secures your wireless account. See also

PUK.

Partnership

PIN2 (personal identification number 2)

Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your A code that protects certain network

Centro and a hands-free device—that can

connect because each device finds the

same passkey on the other device. Once

you form a partnership with a device, you

don’t need to enter a passkey to connect

with that device again. Partnership is also

known as paired relationship, pairing,

trusted device, and trusted pair on some

devices.

settings such as call barring or fixed dialing.

PUK (PIN unlock key)

A special extended password assigned to

your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN

more than three times, your SIM card is

blocked and you must call AT&T for the

PUK.

Quick key

Phone

A letter that you can press and hold to

activate a favorite app. For example, create

a speed-dial button for your mother’s

number and enter the letter M for “Mom”

as the Quick Key. Then when you want to

The application on your Centro that enables

you to make and receive phone calls.

T E R M S

287

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

call her, press and hold M. Your Centro

dials the number.

SMS

The service that exchanges short text

messages almost instantly. Text messages

are typically sent to a mobile phone

number, rather than to an email address

(although this too is possible). These

messages can usually include up to 160

characters; messages with more than 160

characters are automatically split into

several messages. You can send and

receive SMS messages while you are on a

voice call.

SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card

The smartcard, inserted in your Centro,

that contains your mobile account

information, such as your phone number

and the services to which you subscribe.

Phonebook entries and SMS messages

can also be stored on the SIM card.

Slide

A collection of text, pictures, videos, and

sounds that are grouped together within a

multimedia message created in the

Messaging application. During playback, all

the items within a particular slide appear

on the same screen. If a multimedia

message contains multiple slides, each

slide can be viewed separately during

playback.

Streaming

Technology that enables you to access

media content—for example, watch video

or listen to an audio program—directly

from the Internet on your Centro without

needing to download a file to save on your

Centro.

User folder

The folder on your computer that contains

the information you enter in Palm Desktop

software and the information you enter on

your Centro and synchronize with

Palm Desktop software.

T E R M S

288

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FCC RF Safety Statement

Important safety and

legal information

In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users

MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.

A Palm^®brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for

SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.

An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and

provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body

and the unit.

FCC Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If

this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and

on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact

with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will

likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits. See www.fcc.gov/oet/

rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.

To view the highest reported (FCC) specific absorption rates (SAR)

values of the Palm^®Centro^™smart device, visit www.palm.com/

10120.

Declaration of Conformity

This device meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and

is certified with the FCC as.

FCC ID number: O8F-728.

Industry Canada ID number: 3905A-728

More information on the device's SAR can be found from the

following FCC website:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

Declaration of Conformity

We, Palm Inc., declare under sole responsibility that the product:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and

Model name:

Description:

Centro

This device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

PDA phone

Is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative

document:

Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications

Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna

modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate

FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

•

ETSI EN 301 511

ETSI EN 301 908-1

ETSI EN 301 908-2

ETSI EN 300 328

I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D

I N F O R M A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And^LD^Eo^Gw^An^Lload.

289

Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm^®Device

•

ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24

EN60950-1

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices

if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such

an occurrence.

EN 50360

We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance

to all essential requirements of the RTTE Directive 1999/5/EC.

Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused

by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To

most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than

annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing

your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—

the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little

shock discharges the built-up static electricity.

The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and

detailed in Annex IV of directive 1999/5/EC has been related to

Articles:

•

R&TTE Article 3.1 (a) Health and Safety

R&TTE Article 3.1 (b) EMC

ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can

harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take

measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your

Palm^®device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections

against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless

neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.

Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for

plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to

entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm

device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity

that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the

device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such

as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.

R&TTE Article 3.2 Spectrum Usage

Identification mark:

0984 (Notified Body) CE.

This identification mark is permanently provided on the device label.

The technical documentation relevant to the above equipment will be

held at:

Palm Inc.

950 W Maude Avenue

Sunnyvale, CA. 94085

U.S.A.

Person responsible for making this declaration:

Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up

static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before

touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.

The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution

before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing a

device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do

this in many ways, including the following:

David Woo/Sr Compliance Engineer

Sunnyvale/August 31, 2006

•

Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by

simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.

For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged

into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case

should discharge the ESD on your body.

Bluetooth Qualification Program

Information about this listing can be found at:

https://programs.bluetooth.org/tpg/listings.cfm

Bluetooth^®QD ID: B013349

•

Increase the relative humidity of your environment.

Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.

I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y

L E G A L

Download f^Aro^Nm^DWww.So^Im^Na^Fn^Ou^Ra^Mls.^Ac^To^Im^O.^NAll Manuals Search And Download.

290

Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can

contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment

include the following:

•

Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local

regulations.

•

Battery usage by children should be supervised.

•

Low relative humidity.

Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is

dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects

damage, take it to a service center for inspection.

Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For

example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural

fibers like cotton.)

•

Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other

hazard.

•

The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect

electronic devices.

Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to

this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your

hearing.

While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge

static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD

events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your

electronic equipment against ESD.

A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut

endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web

www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.

Battery safety information

•

Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or

shred.

•

Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects

into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,

expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.

•

Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.

Usage Log Your smart device includes a Usage Log that records

software application launches and any device crashes or resets. A

hard reset will not erase the Usage Log. We may, for diagnostic

purposes, access the Usage Log in products returned to Palm.

Only use the battery with a charging system that has been

qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified

battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,

or other hazard.

Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate

recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/

environment.

•

Do not short-circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects

to contact battery terminals.

Replace the battery only with another battery that has been

qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.

Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,

leakage or other hazard.

I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D

I N F O R M A T I O N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And^LD^Eo^Gw^An^Lload.

291

I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y

L E G A L

Download f^Aro^Nm^DWww.So^Im^Na^Fn^Ou^Ra^Mls.^Ac^To^Im^O.^NAll Manuals Search And Download.

292

Specifications

Radio

•

GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band world phone

GPRS class 10, class B

•

EDGE up to 59kbps per time slot

Supports CSD (circuit-switched data)

Speakerphone

Phone features

•

Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 4-barrel connector)

Microphone mute option

TTY/TDD compatible

3-way calling

Processor technology

Expansion

Intel PXA270 Bulverde processor, 312MHz

MicroSD card slot

Battery

•

11850mAH, rechargeable lithium ion

Removable for replacement

Palm OS^®version

Camera

Palm OS 5.4.9

•

1.3 megapixel

Still-image capture resolution (1280 x 1024)

2x digital zoom

Video capture resolution (352 x 288)

Automatic light balance

Size

4.2 in. x 2.1 in. x 0.73 in.

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

293

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Weight

4.12 ounces

Connectivity

•

Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)

Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)

65,536 colors (16-bit color)

Display

•

User-adjustable brightness

320 x 320 resolution

Keyboard

•

Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator

Backlight for low lighting conditions

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

294

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Included software

•

Phone (including Favorites

and Dial Pad)

•

XM Radio (download

required)

Pics & Videos (includes

camera and camcorder)

•

Voice Dial

Voice Memo

Messaging (text and

multimedia)

Documents To Go

Professional

Blazer web browser

•

Calculator (Basic and

Advanced)

(Internet)

•

Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe

•

World Clock

Xpress Mail (download

required)

My Palm Centro

Palm^®Desktop software

and HotSync^®manager

•

VersaMail (email)

Contacts

Calendar

Memos

•

Push to Talk

Quick Tour

Telenav (download

required)

Tasks

SIM Book

SIM Services

AT&T Mall

AT&T Music

•

MobiTV (download

required)

Instant messaging (IM)

Music ID (download

required)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

295

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System requirements

•

Windows 2000, XP, or Vista with USB port

Mac OS 10.2–10.3 with USB port

Later versions may also be supported

32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)

Operating and storage

temperature range

•

5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

296

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

customer support for 12

email and. See email

accounts

phone services and 10

text messages and 112

TTY connections and 82

voicemail and 57

favorite buttons 70 –72

nicknames 133

partnerships 75, 16 1

passwords 247, 248

photos or videos to

albums 178

Index

SYMBOLS

! in Tasks list 200

NUMERICS

playlists 184

active call buttons 143

Active Call View 58 , 59, 142

active calls. See phone calls

Activity Log 103

Add Bookmark command

153

Add Call button 61

Add Contact command 61

Add New Number dialog 60

Add New Number prompt 61

Add Song button 184

Add to album command 179

adding

accessories 16

bookmarks 153

caller IDs 67, 68

captions to photos 172,

179

cities to World Clock 197

contacts 66, 13 2

emoticons 113

private entries 248

QuickText phrases 113

signatures 105

tasks 198

wallpaper 179

addresses

adding recipients 72, 112

entering web 152

highlighting 36

looking up 108

24-hour clock 239

5-way navigator 35, 36

911 calls 245

AC charger 19

accented characters 41 , 42

accessing

application menus 37

applications 45

command buttons 37

documentation 11

email 89, 252

Palm online support 12

Quick Tour 11

web browser 44 , 152

World Clock 197

accessories 16

Account Setup dialog 95

accounts

call forwarding and 63

conference calls and 63

selecting 36, 1 51

sending messages and

93, 96 , 113, 115, 117

synchronizing 269

viewing website 158, 1 59

Advanced Mode (calculator)

212, 213

agenda lists 189

Agenda View 80, 189, 19 4

Alarm check box 191

alarm clock 198

events 190, 191

alarm preferences 198

INDE X

297

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

alarms

adding calendar 191, 195

adding task 199 , 201

recording tones for 196

selecting tones for 195,

196, 201

Album command 179

Album list 98, 176, 179

albums. See photo albums;

video albums

answering phone 56, 62 , 77

antenna 289

applets 151

application categories 241

application list view 241

applications